PROJECT MANUAL INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS FOR OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT EDUCATIONAL SERVICE CENTER DATA ROOM ALTERATION. Oxnard, CA

PROJECT MANUAL INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS FOR OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT Oxnard, CA Client Project Number: ARCHITECT MVE INSTITUTIONAL, INC. 3 MacArthur Place, Suite 850 Santa Ana, CA 92707 Telephone: 949.809.3380 MVEI Project Number: 2011-40130 December 11, 2012

SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Section No. - Title Date DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01110 - Summary of Work 12/11/12 Section 01200 - Price and Payment Procedures 12/11/12 Section 01310 - Project Management and Coordination 12/11/12 Section 01329 - Construction Schedule - Bar Chart 12/11/12 Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures 12/11/12 Section 01351 - Alteration Project Procedures 12/11/12 Section 01423 - Reference Standards 12/11/12 Section 01450 - Quality Control 12/11/12 Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls 12/11/12 Section 01600 - Product Requirements 12/11/12 Section 01630 - Product Substitution Procedures 12/11/12 Section 01730 - Execution Requirements 12/11/12 Section 01732 - Cutting and Patching 12/11/12 Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures 12/11/12 DIVISION 2 SITEWORK Section 02222 Minor Demolition for Remodeling 12/11/12 Section 02318 Excavating, Backfilling, and Compacting for Utilities 12/11/12 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE NOT USED DIVISION 4 MASONRY NOT USED DIVISION 5 METAL WORK NOT USED DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTIC NOT USED DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07213 Batt Insulation 12/11/12 Section 07900 Joint Sealers 12/11/12 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 12/11/12 DIVISION 9 FINISHES TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 00002 Table of Contents 121112

Section No. - Title Date Section 09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies Metal Framing 12/11/12 Section 09511 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 12/11/12 Section 09639 Sealer/Hardener Concrete Floor Finish 12/11/12 Section 09650 Resilient Flooring 12/11/12 Section 09771 Fiber Reinforced Plastic Panels 12/11/12 Section 09900 Painting 12/11/12 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Section 10400 Identifying Devices 12/11/12 Section 10810 Toilet Accessories 12/11/12 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS NOT USED DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section 13965 Clean Agent Fire Suppression System 12/11/12 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT USED DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Section 15300 Automatic Fire Sprinklers 12/11/12 Section 15400 Plumbing 12/11/12 Section 15800 Heating, Ventilating & Air Conditioning 12/11/12 Section 15895 HVAC Equipment & Duct Cleaning 12/11/12 Section 15900 VVT Energy Management & Control System 12/11/12 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements 12/11/12 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 00002 Table of Contents 121112

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work Included. B. Work by Owner. C. Owner furnished products. D. Contractor use of site. E. Work Sequence. F. Owner occupancy. G. Work restrictions. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED SECTION 01110 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Work of this Contract comprises a tenant improvement within an existing educational service center for the Oxnard School District to create a new data equipment room, renovation of an existing restroom to create a new accessible unisex restroom, and related site work for new utilities. B. Construct the work under a single lump sum contract. 1.3 WORK BY OWNER A. Items noted "NIC" (Not In Contract) will be furnished and installed by Owner. 1.4 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Items noted "OFCI" (Owner-Furnished Contractor Installed) will be furnished by Owner and installed by Contractor. B. Items noted "OFOI" (Owner-Furnished Owner Installed) will be furnished by Owner and installed by Owner. C. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for Product delivery to site. 3. On delivery, inspect Products jointly with Contractor. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. SUMMARY OF WORK 01110-1 01110-Summary of Work 121912

5. Arrange for manufacturer's warranties, inspections, and service. D. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 2. Receive and unload Products at site; inspect for completeness or damage, jointly with Owner. 3. Handle, store, install and finish Products. 4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. E. Products furnished and installed by Owner (OFOI) 1. Modular Classroom Building. 2. As indicated on the drawings. F. Items furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor 1. As indicated on the drawings. 1.5 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE A. Limit use of site and premises to allow: 1. Owner occupancy and normal school operations. 2. DISTRICT, PROJECT MANAGER and Architect and their representatives shall at all times have access to work wherever it is in preparation or progress. CONTRACTOR shall provide safe and proper facilities for such access so that DISTRICT, PROJECT MANAGER, and ARCHITECT S respective representatives may perform their functions. B. Construction Operations: Limited to area indicated on drawings. C. Construction schedule and operations owner's project manager. 1.6 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site during entire construction period for conduct of his normal operation. B. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. C. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.. D. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy. E. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and 01110-2 SUMMARY OF WORK 01110-Summary of Work 121912

required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building. F. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building. G. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. H. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. I. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated. J. Provide not less than 72 hours notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed during normal business working hours, Monday through Friday, except as otherwise indicated or required to conform to construction schedule and labor codes. 1. Weekend Hours: 7:00 am to 5:00 pm 2. Early Morning Hours: 7:00 am. 3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: after 5:00 pm 4. Hours for Noisy Operations: from 7:00 to 8:00 am, and after 3:00 pm B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted to do so and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1. Notify District not less than 5 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect s permission. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF DOCUMENT SUMMARY OF WORK 01110-3 01110-Summary of Work 121912

SECTION 01200 PART 1 - GENERAL PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cash allowances. B. Contingency allowances. C. Schedule of Values. D. Application for Payment. E. Defect assessment. F. Non-payment for rejected work. G. Change procedures. H. Alternates. I. Unit prices. 1.2 CASH ALLOWANCES A. Include in the contract sum all cash allowances stated herein. B. Items covered by cash allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities against which the Contractor makes reasonable objection. C. Costs Included in Cash Allowances: Cost of Product to Contractor or Subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts; delivery to site and applicable taxes. D. Costs Not Included in the Cash Allowance: Product handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of products from elements and from damage; labor for installation and finishing; and overhead profit and other expenses contemplated. These expenses shall be included in the contract sum and not in the allowance. E. Funds will be drawn from cash allowance amount only by written authorization of the Owner. F. At closeout of contract, funds remaining in cash allowance amount will be credited to Owner by change order. G. Whenever costs are more than cash allowance amount, the contract amount will be adjusted accordingly by change order. H. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Assist Architect in selection of products and suppliers. 2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and offer recommendations. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01200-1 01200-Price and Payment Procedures 120412

3. On notification of selection by Owner, execute agreement with designated supplier. 4. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery and product handling at site. 5. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit claims for damage. 6. Cash Allowances: a. None identified. 1.3 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE: A. Include in the contract sum all contingency allowances stated herein. B. Costs included in contingency allowance: Cost of work to Contractor or subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts; delivery to site and applicable taxes; product handling, including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of products from damage; labor for installation and finishing; reasonable overhead and profit and other expenses required by work. C. Funds will be drawn from contingency allowance amount only by written authorization of Owner. D. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in contingency allowance amount will be credited to Owner by Change Order. E. Whenever costs are more than contingency allowance amount, the Contract amount will be adjusted accordingly by Change order. F. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Assist Architect in selection of products and suppliers. 2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and offer recommendations. 3. On notification of selection by Owner, execute agreement with designated supplier. 4. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery of product to site. 5. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit claims for damage. 6. Contingency Allowance: A stipulated sum of $ 10,000.00. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit Schedule of Values for approval in duplicate within fourteen days after receipt of Notice to Proceed. B. Format: Submit typed schedule based upon the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the major specification Section. C. Include in each line item, the amount of Allowances specified in this Section. 01200-2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01200-Price and Payment Procedures 120412

D. Include within each line item, a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. E. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, on continuation sheet, with each Application for Payment. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Submit six copies of each application on AIA Form G702 -Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA Form G703 Continuation Sheet. B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment. C. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the General Conditions of the Contract. D. Payment Application Periods: The period of construction covered by each application for payment is the period indicated in the General Conditions of the Contract. E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. F. Waiver of Stop Notices: With each application for payment, submit waivers of stop notices from subcontractors for construction period covered by previous application. G. Final Payment: As specified in the General Conditions of the Contract and in Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures. H. Refer to the General Conditions of the Contract for additional payment provisions. 1.6 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of the Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Architect will direct one of the following remedies: 1. The defective Work may remain, but the listed schedule of value will be adjusted to a new value at the discretion of the Architect. 2. The defective Work will be partially repaired to the instructions and satisfaction of the Architect and the listed schedule of value will be adjusted to reflect a new value at the discretion of the Architect. 1.7 NON-PAYMENT FOR REJECTED WORK A. Payment will not be made for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable. 2. Products determined to be unacceptable before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from the transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required work. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01200-3 01200-Price and Payment Procedures 120412

5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the work. 6. Loading, hauling and disposing of rejected products. 1.8 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time as authorized by General Conditions on AIA Form G710 Architect's Supplemental Instructions. B. The Architect may issue a Proposal Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications. Proposal Requests are for information only and are not to be considered instructions to stop the work or to execute the proposed change. Contractor will prepare and submit a detailed estimate within 14 days. C. Any change in the Work which involves the adjustment to contract sum/price or contract time shall be properly certified by the Contractor as indicated in the General Conditions of the contract. D. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting a Change Order Request to the Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. E. Stipulated Sum Change Order: Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor s Change Order Request as approved by Architect. F. Time and Material/Force Account Change Order: Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the General Conditions of the Contract. G. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material/Force Account basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work as indicated in the General Conditions of the Contract. H. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a directive, signed by the Owner and Architect, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Document will describe changes in the Work, and designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. Promptly execute the change. I. Allowance Adjustment: Adjustment of allowance amounts shall be based upon a properly documented and detailed Change Order Request which substantiates distribution of allowance amounts and actual costs of work in place. J. Change Order Forms: AIA G701 Change Order. K. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the General Conditions of the Contract. L. All addenda (changes and/or revisions prior to award of contract) and change orders (changes and revisions after award of contract) shall be approved by the Architect and the Division of the State Architect prior to start of construction covered by those changes and/or revisions. M. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum. 01200-4 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01200-Price and Payment Procedures 120412

N. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any changes in Contract Time, revise subschedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change and resubmit. O. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.9 UNIT PRICES A. A unit price is an amount proposed by the bidder and stated on the Bid Form as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services that will be added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by change order in the event the estimated quantities of work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. B. Unit prices shall include all necessary material, overhead, profit and applicable taxes. C. The Owner reserves the right to reject the Contractor's measurement of working-place that involves use of established prices, and to have this work measured by an independent surveyor acceptable to the Contractor at the Owner's expense. D. Refer to individual specification sections for construction activities requiring the establishment of unit prices. E. Specification sections referenced in the Schedule of Unit Prices contain requirements for materials and methods described under each unit price. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01200-5 01200-Price and Payment Procedures 120412

This page intentionally left blank 01200-6 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01200-Price and Payment Procedures 120412

SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORMAT* Project: Contractor: Date: Item Description Amount Amount 1. Mobilization and initial expenses 2. General Conditions 3. Bonds and Insurance 4. SITE WORK Temporary Utilities Engineering Layout Temporary Construction/Dust Control General Clean Up/Trash Removal Project Manager/Supervision/Truck Rental Equipment Demolition/Removal Site Site Preparation Earthwork Site Improvements AC Paving/Base/Striping Concrete Curb/Gutters Concrete Paving Irrigation Site Utilities Fire Hydrants Fire Lines Storm Drainage Site Water Site Sewer Electrical Site Service/Lighting Other PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01200-7 01200-Price and Payment Procedures 120412

Item Description Amount Amount 5. FOUNDATIONS Modular Building Foundations 6. INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION Specialties Graphics and Signage Fire protection specialties Other Other 7. ELECTRICAL Distribution Lighting and Power Special Systems Alarm System Communications Emergency System Other TOTAL COST $ *The above categories may be subdivided and items added if the overall order remains the same and the subtotal cost for each category complies with the format as shown. Items not applicable to a particular job may be deleted from this list. Overhead and profit shall be a combined mark up and added proportionally to each line item. END OF SECTION 01200-8 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01200-Price and Payment Procedures 120412

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination. B. Preconstruction conference. C. Progress meetings. D. Request for Interpretation (RFI's). E. Pre-installation conferences. F. Post construction dedication. 1.2 DEFINITIONS SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION A. RFI - Request from Contractor seeking additional information, interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Coordinate construction operations of the different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. C. Prior to commencement of a particular type or kind of work examine relevant information, contract documents and subsequent data issued to the project. D. Verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. E. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. G. In locations where several elements of mechanical and electrical work must be sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit into available space, prepare coordination drawings showing the actual conditions required for the installation. Prepare coordination drawings prior to purchasing, fabricating or installing any of the elements required to be coordinated. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-1 01310-Project Management and Coordination 120412

H. Closing up of walls, partitions or furred spaces, backfilling and other covering up operations shall not proceed until all enclosed or covered work and inspections have been completed. Verify before proceeding. I. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owners partial occupancy. J. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. K. Coordinate all utility company work in accordance with the General Conditions. L. Coordinate field engineering with the provisions of Section 01730. 1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Architect will schedule a conference immediately after receipt of fully executed contract documents prior to project mobilization. B. Mandatory Attendance: Owner, Owner's Resident Inspector, Owner's Testing Laboratory Representative, Architect, Contractor, Contractor's Project Manager and Contractor's Job Superintendent. C. Optional Attendance: Architect's consultants, subcontractors and utility company representatives. D. Architect will preside at conference, record minutes and distribute copies. E. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2. Issue Notice to Proceed. 3. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 4. Distribution of Contract Documents. 5. Federal and State labor law requirements applicable to Contract. 6. 6. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 7. Designation of responsible personnel representing the parties. 8. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures. 9. Procedures for testing and inspection. 10. Scheduling. 11. Critical work sequence and long lead items. 01310-2 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-Project Management and Coordination 120412

12. Work restrictions and working hours. 13. Use of site and premises. 14. Owner occupancy requirements. 15. Preparation of Record Drawings. 16. Security. 17. Parking availability. 1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Architect will schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum intervals monthly. B. Architect will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda, preside at meetings, record minutes (Field Reports), and distribute copies. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Owner's Inspector, and Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. (Field Reports) 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Requests For Information (RFI s). 7. Status of Proposal Requests (PR s). 8. Status of Change Order Requests (COR s). 9. Status of Change Orders (CO s). 10. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 11. Maintenance of construction schedule. 12. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 13. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 14. Coordination of projected progress. 15. Maintenance of quality and work standards. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-3 01310-Project Management and Coordination 120412

16. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 17. Other business relating to Work. 1.6 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI'S) A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Progress Meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. 3. Each RFI shall address only one subject matter. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. Date. 2. Project name. 3. Owner s name. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 8. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 9. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 10. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 11. Contractor's signature. 12. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments. C. Hard-Copy RFIs: Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number. D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above. Attachments shall be electronic files in a format that will allow electronic editing 01310-4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-Project Management and Coordination 120412

by the Architect. E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow fifteen days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. If the RFI is required to be forwarded to a consultant, subconsultant, or Owner for a response, the response time will be twenty five days. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for coordination information which is the responsibility of the Contractor. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals and substitutions. g. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's allowable time for response will start again. 3. Architect s review of or response to RFIs shall not constitute an approval, direction, or procedure related to construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of Contractor. 4. Architect s review of or response to RFIs shall not constitute an approval, direction, or procedure related to the construction site safety precautions, procedures or methodology of Contractor. 5. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Order Request according to Division 1 Section 01200 Price and Payment Procedures. a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within five days of receipt of the RFI response. b. Under no circumstances is the Architect s review of or response to RFIs to be considered an authorization to depart from the Contract Documents or an authorization to perform extra work. F. On receipt of Architect's action immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. G. Review response and notify Architect within three days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1.7 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. When required in individual specification Section, convene a pre-installation conference prior to PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-5 01310-Project Management and Coordination 120412

commencing work of the Section. Refer to individual specification section for timing requirements of conference. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific Section. C. Notify Architect a minimum of seven days in advance of meeting date. D. Pre-installation conference to coincide with regularly scheduled progress meeting. E. Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes, and distribute copies within two days after conference to participants. F. Agenda: 1. Review of Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer s recommendations. 3. Status of submittals. 4. Schedule of work activities. 5. Deliveries of materials and equipment. 6. Sequence of operation. 7. Interface requirements. 8. Access. 9. Site utilization. 10. Tests and inspections. 11. Temporary facilities and controls. 12. Quality and work standards. 1.8 POST CONSTRUCTION DEDICATION A. Attendance Required: Project superintendent, project manager, major subcontractors, Owner and Architect. B. Preparation prior to Dedication: 1. Assist Owner in operation of mechanical systems. 2. Verify operation and adjust controls for communication systems. 3. Assist Owner in operation of lighting systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used 01310-6 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-Project Management and Coordination 120412

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-7 01310-Project Management and Coordination 120412

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. References. B. Performance requirements. C. Qualifications. D. Quality Assurance. E. Project record documents. F. Submittals. G. Review and evaluation. H. Format. I. Construction schedule. J. Short interval schedule. K. Requested time adjustment schedule. L. Recovery schedule. M. Updating schedules. N. Distribution. 1.2 REFERENCES SECTION 01329 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE - BAR CHART A. Construction Planning and Scheduling Manual - A Manual for General Contractors and the Construction Industry, The Associated General Contractors of America (AGC). B. National Weather Service - Local Climatological Data. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Ensure adequate scheduling during construction activities so work may be prosecuted in an orderly and expeditious manner within stipulated Contract Time. B. Ensure coordination of Contractor and subcontractors at all levels. C. Ensure coordination of submittals, fabrication, delivery, erection, installation, and testing of materials and equipment. D. Ensure on-time delivery of Owner furnished materials and equipment. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE - BAR CHART 01329-1 01329-Construction Schedule-Bar Chart 120412

E. Ensure coordination of jurisdictional reviews. F. Assist in preparation and evaluation of applications for payment. G. Assist in monitoring progress of work. H. Assist in evaluation of proposed changes to Contract Time. I. Assist in evaluation of proposed changes to Construction Schedule. J. Assist in detection of schedule delays and identification of corrective actions. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Scheduler: Personnel with 3 years minimum experience in scheduling construction work of a complexity and size comparable to this Project. B. Administrative Personnel: 3 years minimum experience in using and monitoring schedules on comparable projects. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with Construction Planning and Scheduling Manual published by the AGC. B. In the event of discrepancy between the AGC publication and this section, provisions of this section shall govern. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit record documents under provisions of Section 01770. B. Submit one reproducible and two copies of final Record Construction Schedule which reflects actual construction of this Project. C. Record schedule shall be certified for compliance with actual way project was constructed. D. Receipt of Record Construction Schedule shall be a condition precedent to any retainage release or final payment. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Within 7 days from the Notice of Award submit proposed Early Work Schedule and preliminary Cost Report defining activities for first 60 days of Work. C. Within 45 days from the Notice of Award submit proposed Construction Schedule and final Cost Report. D. Submit updated Construction Schedule at least 10 days prior to each Application for Payment. E. Submit Short Interval Schedule at each Construction Progress Meeting. 01329-2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE - BAR CHART 01329-Construction Schedule-Bar Chart 120412

F. Submit Time Adjustment Schedule within 10 days of commencement of a claimed delay. G. Submit Recovery Schedules as required by completion of work. H. Submit one reproducible and two copies of each schedule and cost report. 1.8 REVIEW AND EVALUATION A. Participate in joint review of Construction Schedule and Reports with Owner and Architect. B. Within 7 days of receipt of Owner and Architect's comments provide satisfactory revision to Construction Schedule or adequate justification for activities in question. C. In the event that an activity or element of work is not detected by Owner or Architect review, such omission or error shall be corrected by next scheduled update and shall not affect Contract Time. D. Acceptance by Owner of corrected Construction Schedule shall be a condition precedent to making any progress payments after first 60 days of Contract. E. Cost-loaded values of Construction Schedule shall be basis for determining progress payments. F. Review and acceptance by Owner and Architect of Construction Schedule does not constitute responsibility whatsoever for accuracy or feasibility of schedules nor does such acceptance expressly or impliedly warrant, acknowledge or admit reasonableness of activities, logic, duration, or cost loading stated or implied on schedules. 1.9 FORMAT A. Shall be fully developed horizontal bar-chart-type schedule prepared under concepts and methods outlined in AGC Construction Planning and Scheduling Manual. B. Provide separate bar for each activity or operation. C. Prepare schedule on sheet of sufficient width to clearly show data. D. Provide continuous heavy vertical line identifying first day of week. E. Provide continuous subordinate vertical line identifying each day of week. F. Identify activities by number & description. G. Show each activity in proper sequence. H. Indicate graphically sequences necessary for related activities. I. Provide legend of symbols and abbreviations used. 1.10 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Shall include Early Work Schedule as first 60 days of Construction Schedule. B. Shall be a fully developed horizontal bar-chart-type schedule. C. Shall indicate a completion date for project that is no later than required completion date. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE - BAR CHART 01329-3 01329-Construction Schedule-Bar Chart 120412

D. Conform to mandatory dates specified in the contract documents. E. Should schedule indicate a completion date earlier than any required completion date, Owner or Architect shall not be liable for any costs should project be unable to be completed by such date. F. Seasonal weather shall be considered in planning and scheduling of all work. Seasonal rainfall shall be 10 year average for the month as evidenced by Local Climatological Data obtained from U.S. National Weather Service. G. Provide sub-schedules to define critical portions of entire schedule. H. Indicate procurement activities, delivery and installation of Owner furnished material and equipment. I. Level of detail shall correspond to complexity of work involved. J. As developed shall show sequence of activities required for complete performance of Work. K. Shall be logical and show a coordinated plan of Work. L. Show order of activities. Include specific dates of completion. M. Duration of activities shall be coordinated with subcontractors and suppliers and shall be best estimate of time required. N. Failure to include any activity shall not be an excuse for completing all work by required completion date. O. An activity shall meet the following criteria: 1. Any portion or element of work, action, or reaction that is precisely described, readily identifiable, and is a function of a logical sequential process. 2. Descriptions shall be clear and concise. Beginning and end shall be readily verifiable. Starts and finishes shall be scheduled by logical restraints. 3. Responsibility shall be identified with a single performing entity. 4. Additional codes shall identify building, floor, bid item and CSI classification. 5. Assigned dollar value (cost-loading) of each activity shall cumulatively equal total contract amount. Mobilization, bond and insurance costs shall be separate. General requirement costs, overhead, profit, shall be prorated throughout all activities. Activity costs shall correlate with Schedule of Values. P. For major equipment and materials show a sequence of activities including: 1. Preparation of shop drawings and sample submissions. 2. Review of shop drawings and samples. 3. Finish and color selection. 4. Fabrication and delivery. 01329-4 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE - BAR CHART 01329-Construction Schedule-Bar Chart 120412

5. Erection or installation. 6. Testing. Q. Include a minimum of 15 days prior to completion date for punch lists and clean up. No other activities shall be scheduled during this period. 1.11 SHORT INTERVAL SCHEDULE A. Shall be fully developed horizontal bar-chart-type schedule directly derived from Construction Schedule. B. Prepare schedule on sheet of sufficient width to clearly show data. C. Identify activities by same description as Construction Schedule. D. Show each activity in proper sequence. E. Indicate graphically sequences necessary for related activities. F. Indicate activities completed or in progress for previous 2 week period. G. Indicate activities scheduled for succeeding 2 week period. H. Further detail may be added if necessary to monitor schedule. 1.12 REQUESTED TIME ADJUSTMENT SCHEDULE A. Updated Construction Schedule shall not show a completion date later than the Contract Time, subject to any time extensions processed as part of a Change Order. B. If an extension of time is requested a separate schedule entitled "Requested Time Adjustment Schedule" shall be submitted to Owner and Architect. C. Indicate requested adjustments in Contract Time which are due to changes or delays in completion of work. D. Extension request shall include forecast of project completion date and actual achievement of any dates listed in Agreement. E. To the extent that any requests are pending at time of any Construction Schedule update, Time Adjustment Schedule shall also be updated. F. Schedule shall be a fully developed horizontal bar-chart-type schedule. G. Accompany schedule with formal written time extension request and detailed impact analysis justifying extension. H. Time impact analysis shall demonstrate time impact based upon date of delay, and status of construction at that time. I. Activity delays shall not automatically constitute an extension of Contract Time. J. Failure of subcontractors shall not be justification for an extension of time. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE - BAR CHART 01329-5 01329-Construction Schedule-Bar Chart 120412

K. Extensions will be granted only to extent that time adjustments extend Contract completion date. L. Owner shall not have an obligation to consider any time extension request unless requirements of Contract Documents, and specifically, but not limited to these requirements are complied with. M. Owner shall not be responsible or liable for any construction acceleration due to failure of Owner to grant time extensions under Contract Documents should requested adjustments in Contract Time not substantially comply with submission and justification requirements of Contract for time extension requests. N. In the event a Requested Time Adjustment Schedule and Time Impact Analysis are not submitted within 10 days after commencement of a delay it is mutually agreed that delay does not require a Contract time extension. 1.13 RECOVERY SCHEDULE A. When activities are behind Construction Schedule a supplementary Recovery Schedule shall be submitted. B. Form and detail shall be sufficient to explain and display how activities will be rescheduled to regain compliance with Construction Schedule. C. Maximum duration shall be one month and shall coincide with payment period. D. Ten days prior to expiration of Recovery Schedule verification to determine if activities have regained compliance with Construction Schedule will be made. Based upon this verification the following will occur: 1. Supplemental Recovery Schedule will be submitted to address subsequent payment period. 2. Construction Schedule will be resumed. 1.14 UPDATING SCHEDULES A. Review and update schedule at least 10 days prior to submitting an Application for Payment. B. Approved change orders which affect schedule shall be identified as separate new activities. C. Change orders of less than $20,000.00 value or less than 3 days duration need not be shown unless completion date is affected. D. Maintain schedule to record actual prosecution and progress. E. No other revisions shall be made to schedule unless authorized by Owner. F. Provide narrative Progress Report at time of schedule update which details the following: 1. Activities or portions of activities completed during previous reporting period. 2. Actual start dates for activities currently in progress. 3. List of major construction equipment used during reporting period and any equipment idle. 01329-6 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE - BAR CHART 01329-Construction Schedule-Bar Chart 120412

4. Number of personnel by craft engaged on Work during reporting period. 5. Progress analysis describing problem areas. 6. Current and anticipated delay factors and their impact. 7. Proposed corrective actions for Recovery Schedule. 8. Proposed modifications, additions, deletions and changes in Construction Schedule. G. Schedule update will form basis upon which progress payments will be made. H. Owner will not be obligated to review or process Application for Payment until schedule and Progress Report have been submitted. 1.15 DISTRIBUTION A. Following joint review and acceptance of updated schedules distribute copies to Owner, Architect, and all other concerned parties. B. Instruct recipients to promptly report in writing any problem anticipated by projections shown in schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE - BAR CHART 01329-7 01329-Construction Schedule-Bar Chart 120412

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures. B. Processing time. C. Proposed Products list. D. Shop drawings. E. Product data. F. Samples. G. Manufacturers' instructions. H. Manufacturers' certificates. I. Deferred approval requirements. J. Submittal schedule. 1.2 RELATED SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Progress Payments: Section 01200 - Price and Payment Procedures. B. Schedule of Values: Section 01200 - Price and Payment Procedures. C. Coordination Drawings: Section 01310 - Project Management and Coordination. D. Construction Schedule: Section 01329. E. Tests and Inspections: Section 01458 Testing Laboratory Services. F. Substitutions: Section 01630 Product Substitution Procedures. G. Certified Final Property Survey: Section 01730 Execution Requirements. H. Closeout Procedures: Section 01770 Closeout Procedures. I. The General Conditions set forth additional requirements for submittals. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal in conformance with requirements of this section. B. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Re-submittals to have original number with an alphanumeric suffix. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-1 01330-Submittal Procedures 120412

C. Identify Project and Architect's project number, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent Drawing and detail number(s), and specification Section number, as appropriate. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. Submittals without Contractor's stamp and signature will be returned without review. E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect at MVE Institutional, Inc. 3 MacArthur Place Suite 850, Santa Ana, California 92707. Coordinate submission of related items. F. Make submittals in groups containing associated and related items to make sure that information is available for checking each item when it is received. G. Submittals for all items requiring color selection must be received before any will be selected. H. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received. I. Make submittals in advance of scheduled dates for installation to allow specified time for review, revisions, and resubmission prior to final review and subsequent placement of orders. J. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit proper processing. K. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. L. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. M. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous submittal. N. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. O. Partial submittals will be considered non responsive and will be returned without review. P. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. Submittals not requested will be returned without review. Q. Architect will not review submittals that contain material data safety sheets (MSDS) and will return them for re-submittal. R. Material safety data sheets (MSDS) will only be reviewed by Architect when submitted to show compliance with LEED certification requirements. Non-LEED submittals that include material safety data sheets will be returned for re-submittal. S. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on submittals without separate written request as required by provisions of Section 01630 - Product Substitution Procedures. 01330-2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-Submittal Procedures 120412

1.4 PROCESSING TIME A. Time period for review of submittals will commence upon receipt of submittal by Architect. B. Initial Review: Allow ten working days for each submittal. C. Re-submittal Review: Allow ten working days for each re-submittal. D. Sequential Review: Allow fifteen working days for initial and re-submittal review of each submittal where review is required by Architect s consultant s, Owner or other parties indicated. E. Deferred Approval Review. Allow a minimum of ninety calendar days for each submittal and any subsequent re-submittal review by the Division of the State Architect. 1.5 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST A. Within fourteen days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, model number, and designated specification section of each product. B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings in electronic (PDF) format to the Architect. B. Review comments will be marked up electronically in PDF file and returned to contractor in electronic format. If re-submittal is required, the Contractor shall revise the drawings incorporating the prior review comments and resubmit the drawings electronically in PDF format. The Contractor shall make and distribute copies of final review sets as required for his purposes. C. After review, distribute in accordance with article on procedures stated above and provide copies for Record Documents described in Section 01770 -Closeout Procedures. D. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information and submit as shop drawings. E. Standard information prepared without specific reference to project requirements will not be considered a shop drawing. F. Do not use or allow others to use shop drawings which have been submitted and have been rejected. G. Upon written request, Architect s electronic CAD files will be provided for use in connection with preparation of shop drawings subject to the acceptance of the Architect s standard terms and conditions for electronic file transfer. A service fee of $25.00 per drawing sheet shall be remitted to Architect prior to release of electronic files. 1.7 PRODUCT DATA A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit six copies of data for each product which Contractor requires. Four copies will be retained by Architect. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-3 01330-Submittal Procedures 120412

B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project. C. After review, distribute in accordance with article on procedures stated above and provide copies for Record Documents described in Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures. 1.8 SAMPLES A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. B. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information. C. Submit the number of samples which Contractor requires, plus two which will be retained by Architect. D. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual specification Sections. 1.9 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. 1.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' certificate to Architect for review, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3-3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE SPEC SECTION TITLE *SAMPLE CATALOG SHEET Div. 2 Water Distribution 6 Div. 2 Sanitary Sewerage 6 Div. 2 Storm Drainage 6 Div. 2 Bituminous Concrete Paving 6 Div. 2 Cement Concrete Paving 6 SHOP DRAWING 01330-4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-Submittal Procedures 120412

SPEC SECTION TITLE *SAMPLE CATALOG SHEET SHOP DRAWING 03300 Concrete 6 07900 Joint Sealers 6 10400 Identifying Devices 6 6 10520 Fire Protection Specialties 6 10810 Toilet Accessories 6 Div. 16 Electrical 6 Div. 16 Fire Alarm 6 6 * Samples are required for Architect's "color and material board". To expedite approval, Contractor shall expedite the submittal of these items. Color selections will not be made until all such items are received. END OF SECTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-5 01330-Submittal Procedures 120412

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 01351 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES A. Products and installation for altering, patching and extending Work. B. Transition and adjustments. C. Repair of damaged surfaces, finishes, and cleaning. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Protect and Maintain: To remove deteriorating corrosion, reapply protective coatings, and install protective measures such as temporary guards; to provide the least degree of intervention B. Repair: To stabilize, consolidate, or conserve; to retain existing materials and features while employing as little new material as possible. Repair includes patching, piecing-in, splicing, consolidating, or otherwise reinforcing or upgrading materials. Repair also includes limited replacement to match existing, rehabilitation, and reconstruction, with compatible substitute materials for deteriorated or missing parts of features when there are surviving prototypes. C. Replace: To duplicate and replace entire features with new material to match existing. Replacement includes the following conditions: D. Duplication: Includes replacing elements damaged beyond repair or missing. Original material is indicated as the pattern for creating new duplicated elements. E. Replacement with New Materials: Includes replacement with new material when original material is not available as patterns for creating new duplicated elements. F. Replacement with Substitute Materials: Includes replacement with compatible substitute materials. Substitute materials are not allowed, unless otherwise indicated. G. Remove: To detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. H. Remove and Salvage: To detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner. I. Remove and Reinstall: To detach items from existing construction, repair and clean them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. J. Existing to Remain or Retain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. K. Match Existing: Material that matches existing materials, as much as possible, in species, cut, color, grain, and finish. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. If alternate methods and materials to those indicated are proposed for any work, provide written ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01351-1 01351-Alteration Project Procedures 120412

description of proposed methods and comparable products. B. Where existing conditions may be misconstrued as damage caused by alteration procedures submit evidence of adjacent construction before work begins. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK A. New Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspection and testing products where necessary, referring to existing Work as a standard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new Work. B. Beginning of alteration Work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work. Replace and restore at completion. B. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for finished Work. C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. D. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and finishes. E. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion and to accommodate Owner occupancy. B. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring products and finishes to specified condition. C. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. D. Install products as specified in individual Sections. 01351-2 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01351-Alteration Project Procedures 120412

3.4 TRANSITIONS A. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance. B. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, request instructions from Architect. 3.5 ADJUSTMENTS A. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. B. Where a change of plane of 1/8 inch or more occurs, request instructions from Architect. C. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required. D. Fit work at penetrations of surfaces as specified in Section 01732. 3.6 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES A. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. B. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. 3.7 FINISHES A. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Product Sections. B. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 3.8 CLEANING A. Match samples of existing materials that have been cleaned and identified for acceptable cleaning levels. B. Avoid over cleaning to prevent damage to existing materials. END OF SECTION ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01351-3 01351-Alteration Project Procedures 120412

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Definitions. B. Specification format and content. C. Industry standards. D. Codes and standards. E. Governing regulations/authorities. 1.2 DEFINITIONS SECTION 01423 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. General: Basic contract definitions are included in the General Conditions. B. Regulations: Includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the work. 1.3 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT A. Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the construction Specifications Institute's 16-Division format and Master format numbering system. B. The sections are placed in the Project Manual in numeric sequence; however, this sequence is not complete and the Table of Contents of the specifications must be consulted to determine the total listing of sections. C. The section title is not intended to limit the meaning or content of the section, nor to be fully descriptive of the requirements specified therein. D. The organization of the specifications shall not control the division of the work among subcontractors or establish the extent of work to be performed by any trade. E. Specifications use certain conventions regarding style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are: 1. Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words that are implied, but not stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable to maintain the context of the Contract Document indicated. 2. Imperative and streamlined language is generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. Subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled REFERENCE STANDARDS 01423-1 01423-Reference Standards 120412

indirectly by the Contractor, or by others when so noted. 3. The words "shall be" are implied wherever a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Except where Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards shall apply as if bound into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made part of Contract Documents by reference. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date for receiving bids except when a specific date is indicated. C. Where compliance with 2 or more standards is specified and where standards may establish different or conflicting requirements for quantities or quality levels, the more stringent, higher quality and greater quantity of work shall apply. D. The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. Indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements. E. Each entity engaged in construction of the work is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. F. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required activity, Contractor shall obtain copies directly from publication source. G. Trade associations names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where such abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized trade association, standards-generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the content of the text provision. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of Associations", published by Gale Research Co., available in most libraries. H. Refer to individual specification sections and related drawings for names and abbreviations of trade associations and standards applicable to specific portions of the work. In particular, refer to Division 15 for names and abbreviations applicable to mechanical work, and refer to Division 16 for names and abbreviations applicable to electrical work. I. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Latest edition of pertaining ordinances, laws, rules, codes, regulations, standards, and others of public agencies having jurisdiction of the work are intended wherever reference is made in either the singular or plural to Code or Building Code except as otherwise specified, including but not limited to latest edition of those in the following listing. 1. 2010 Administrative Regulations California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 24, Part 1 2. 2010 California Building Code (CBC) California (2009 International Bldg. Code with 2010 Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 24, Part 2 California amendments). 01423-2 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01423-Reference Standards 120412

3. 2010 California Electrical Code (CEC) California (2008 National Electric Code (NEC) with 2010 Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 24, Part 3 California amendments). 4. 2010 California Mechanical Code (CMC) (2009 IAPMO Uniform Mech. Code with 2010 California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 24, Part 4 California amendments). 5. 2010 California Plumbing Code (CPC) (2009 IAPMO Uniform Plumbing code with 2010 California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 24, California amendments). Part 5 6. 2010 California Energy Code California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 24, Part 6 7. 2010 California Elevator Safety Regulations California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 24, Part 7 8. 2010 California Fire Code (CFC) California Code (2009 International Fire Code with 2010 California of Regulations (CCR) Title 24, Part 9 amendments). 9. 1990 State Fire Marshal Regulations California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 19 (As amended to date) 11. 2010 State Referenced Standards Code California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 24, 12. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) 13. Automatic Sprinkler Systems 2010 Edition 14. Standpipe Systems 2010 Edition 15. Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems 2010 Editions 16. Wet Chemical Systems 2010 Editions 17. National Fire Alarm Code (California Amended) 2010 Edition (Note: See UL Standard 1971 for Visual Devises ) 18. Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems 2006 Edition 1.6 GOVERNING REGULATIONS/AUTHORITIES A. Authorities having jurisdiction have been contacted where necessary to obtain information for preparation of Contract Documents. Contact authorities having jurisdiction directly for information having a bearing on the work. B. Comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations indicated and which bear on the conduct of the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION REFERENCE STANDARDS 01423-3 01423-Reference Standards 120412

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interpretation of requirements. B. Quality assurance and control of installation. C. Tolerances. D. Field samples. E. Mock-up. F. Manufacturers' field services and reports. 1.2 INTERPRETATION OF REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01450 QUALITY CONTROL A. If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. B. The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation shall comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. C. Where codes or specified standards indicate higher standards, more stringent tolerances or more precise workmanship than levels shown or specified, comply with most stringent requirements. D. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and - control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. QUALITY CONTROL 01450-1 01450-Quality Control 120412

E. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. F. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. G. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. H. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. 1.4 TOLERANCES A. Monitor tolerance control of installed products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturer's tolerances. Should manufacturer's tolerance conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 1.5 FIELD SAMPLES A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications sections for review. B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work. C. Where field sample is specified in individual sections to be removed, clear area after field sample has been reviewed by Architect. 1.6 MOCK-UP A. Mock-up will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. B. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals and finishes. C. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. D. Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after mock-up has been reviewed by Architect. 1.7 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment and other field services as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. 01450-2 QUALITY CONTROL 01450-Quality Control 120412

C. Submit report in duplicate within 15 days of observation to Architect for review. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01730. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in he correct locations. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. END OF SECTION QUALITY CONTROL 01450-3 01450-Quality Control 120412

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities B. Temporary Controls 1.2 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS A. Provide temporary chemical type toilet facilities and enclosures. B. Maintain temporary toilet facilities in a sanitary manner. C. Existing facilities shall not be used. 1.3 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. B. Provide protection for plant life and trees designated to remain and for soft and hardscape areas adjacent to work, replace damaged materials in kind. C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. 1.4 FENCING A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence. B. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. Post fences and gates with no trespassing signs. 1.5 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL A. Conform to Best Management Practices for erosion and sediment control and non-storm water management as defined in Sections 3 and 4 of the Construction Activity Handbook published by the Storm Water Quality Association. B. Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. C. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time. D. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow. E. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays. F. Coordinate construction activities with control procedures established in the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-1 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls 120612

1.6 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. B. Conform to Best Management Practices for waste management and material controls as defined in Section 4 of the Construction Activity Handbook published by the Storm Water Quality Association. C. Coordinate construction activities with control procedures established in the Storm Water Pollution Plan (SWPPP). 1.7 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and existing facilities and Owner s operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Coordinate with Owner s security program. 1.8 TRAFFIC CONTROL A. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Obtain all permits, provide all materials and maintain controls as required of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to hydrants. 1.9 WASTE DISPOSAL A. Maintain building areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. B. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and legally dispose of off site. C. Maintain site area in a clean and orderly condition. 1.10 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide temporary directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. B. No other signs are allowed except those required by law. 1.11 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion review. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of the Contractor. E. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. 01500-2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls 120612

F. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. G. Replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily restored. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-3 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls 120612

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products. B. Transportation and handling. C. Storage and protection. D. Damage and restoration. 1.2 PRODUCTS SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. B. Products specified or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components. D. Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and are unused at the time of installation. E. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and detail needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. F. Where a specific manufacturer s product is specified as the basis of design, the designation shall establish the qualities relating to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance and other characteristics for comparable products of other named manufacturers. G. Where products are specified by name or by manufacturer provide the product or manufacturer specified. No substitutions will be permitted unless made under the provisions of Section 01630. H. Where specifications only describe a product or assembly by listing exact characteristics required, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics. I. Where specifications only require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with those requirements. J. Where the specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, provide a product that complies with the standards, codes or regulations specified. K. Where specifications require review and acceptance of a sample, the Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product sample is acceptable or not. L. Provide materials and products specified in the full range of color, texture and pattern for selection by Architect. Range shall include standard color/texture/pattern available from PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-1 01600-Product Requirements 120612

manufacturer, and special color/texture/pattern available from manufacturer as advertised in product data and brochures. M. Where product is designated to match an existing product, provide product that matches in size, profile, finish, dimension and other characteristics the existing product identified. 1.3 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at site to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other losses. D. Deliver products in manufacturer s original sealed container or packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 1.4 STORAGE A. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. B. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures. C. Store products in a manner that will not damage or overload project structure. D. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. E. Provide off-site storage when site does not permit on-site storage. F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. G. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. I. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. J. Prevent the discharge of pollutants to storm water from storage of materials on-site using best management practice techniques defined in Chapter 4 of the Construction Activity Handbook published by the Storm Water Quality Task Force. 01600-2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-Product Requirements 120612

1.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Provide humidity and temperature control for installed products as recommended by materials manufacturer. G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.6 DAMAGE AND RESTORATIONS A. Damage to existing or new work whether accidental or not shall be restored or replaced as specified or directed by Architect. B. Restoration shall be equal to structural performance of original work. C. Finish shall match appearance of existing adjacent work. D. Work not properly restored or where not capable of being restored shall be removed and replaced. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-3 01600-Product Requirements 120612

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Product options. B. Substitution procedures. 1.2 DEFINITIONS SECTION 01630 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Requests for changes in products, materials, or equipment required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor prior to and after award of the Contract are considered requests for substitutions. The following are not considered substitutions: 1. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 2. Specified options of products, materials, and equipment included in Contract Documents. 1.3 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with Provision for Substitution: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications with substitution of products or manufacturer only when submitted under provisions of this section. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers without Provision for Substitution: No substitution allowed. 1.4 LIMITATIONS ON SUBSTITUTIONS SUBMITTED PRIOR TO THE RECEIPT OF BIDS A. The Bid shall be based upon the standards of quality established by those items of equipment and/or materials which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents. B. Architect may consider requests for substitutions of specified equipment and/or materials only when requests are received by Architect prior to the date established for the receipt of bids. as stipulated in Document 00100 - Information. C. Consideration by Architect of a substitution request will be made only if request is made in strict conformance with provisions of this section. D. Burden of proof of merit of requested substitution is the responsibility of the entity requesting the substitution. E. It is the sole responsibility of the entity requesting the substitution to establish proper content of submittal for requests for substitutions. Incomplete submittals will be rejected. F. Architect's decision on substitution requests are final and do not require documentation or justification. PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01630-1 01630-Product Substitution Procedures 120612

G. When substitution is not accepted, provide specified product. H. Substitute products shall not be included within the bid without written acceptance by Addendum. 1.5 LIMITATIONS ON SUBSTITUTIONS SUBMITTED AFTER THE AWARD OF THE CONTRACT A. The Contract is based upon the standards of quality established by those items of equipment and/or materials which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents. B. Consideration by Architect of substitution requests received after the established date of the receipt of bids or contract award will only be made when one or more of the following conditions are met and documented: 1. Specified item fails to comply with regulatory requirements. 2. Specified item has been discontinued. 3. Specified item, through no fault of the Contractor, is unavailable in the time frame required to meet project schedule. 4. Specified item, through subsequent information disclosure, will not perform properly or fit in designated space. 5. Manufacturer declares specified product to be unsuitable for use intended or refuses to warrant installation of product. 6. Substitution would be, in the sole judgment of the Architect, a substantial benefit to the Owner in terms of cost, time, energy conservation, or other consideration of merit. C. Notwithstanding the provisions of Article 1.4 of this section and the above, the Architect may consider a substitution request after the date of the receipt of bids or contract award, if in the sole discretion of the Architect, there appears to be just cause for such a request. The acceptance of such a late request does not waive any other requirement as stated herein. D. Consideration by Architect of a substitution request will be made only if request is made in strict conformance with provisions of this section. E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without separate written request as required by provisions of this section. F. Review of shop drawings does not constitute acceptance of substitutions indicated or implied on shop drawings. G. Substitutions will not be considered when requested or submitted directly by subcontractor or supplier. H. Substitutions will not be considered as a result of the failure to pursue the work promptly or coordinate activities properly. I. Burden of proof of merit of requested substitution is the responsibility of the Contractor. J. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to establish proper content of submittal for requests for substitutions. Incomplete submittals will be rejected. 01630-2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01630-Product Substitution Procedures 120612

K. Owner shall receive full benefit of any cost reduction as a result of any request for substitution. L. Architect's decision on substitution requests is final and does not require documentation or justification. M. When substitution is not accepted, provide specified product. N. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance. O. The contractor shall pay the District for design fees associated with review of the proposed substitution(s) by the Architect required to review contractor requested substitutions after award of the contract. Design fees shall include the costs of Architect's engineers and consultants as required as well as other impacted contractors. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. It shall be the responsibility of the entity requesting the substitution to obtain all regulatory approvals required for proposed substitutions. B. All regulatory approvals shall be obtained for proposed substitutions prior to submittal of substitution request to Architect. C. All costs incurred by the Owner in obtaining regulatory approvals for proposed substitutions to include the costs of the Architect and any authority having jurisdiction over the project shall be reimbursed to the Owner. Costs of these services shall be reimbursed regardless of final acceptance or rejection of substitution. D. Substitutions of materials or work procedures which affect the health, safety and welfare of the public shall have prior approval of the Division of the State Architect (DSA) field representative. 1.7 SUBSTITUTION REPRESENTATION A. In submitting a request for substitution, the entity requesting the substitution makes the representation that he or she: 1. Has investigated the proposed substitution and has determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty or guarantee for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work which may be required for the work to be completed with no additional cost to the Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional cost or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner for the cost of Architect's review or redesign services associated with substitution request. 1.8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE A. Submit each request in electronic (pdf) format. PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01630-3 01630-Product Substitution Procedures 120612

B. Submit request with Architect's Substitution Request Form. Form may be obtained at the office of the Architect. Substitution requests received without request form will be returned un-reviewed. C. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. D. Request to include sufficient data so that direct comparison of proposed substitution can be made. E. Provide complete documentation for each request. Documentation shall include the following information, as appropriate, as a minimum: 1. Statement of cause for substitution request. 2. Identify product by specification section and article number. 3. Provide manufacturer's name, address, and phone number. List fabricators, suppliers, and installers as appropriate. 4. List similar projects where proposed substitution has been used, dates of installation and names of Architect and Owner. 5. List availability of maintenance services and replacement materials. 6. Documented or confirmation of regulatory approval. 7. Product data, including drawings and descriptions of products. 8. Fabrication and installation procedures. 9. Samples of proposed substitutions. 10. Itemized comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the product specified. Significant qualities may include size, weight, durability, performance requirements and visual effects. 11. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other items of work that will become necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. 12. Statement on the substitutions effect on the construction schedule. 13. Cost information including a proposal of the net change, if any, in the Contract sum if the substitution is submitted after the receipt of bids or contract award. 14. Certification that the substitution is equal to or better in every respect to that required by the Contract Documents and that substitution will perform adequately in the application intended. 15. Statement that substitution is in compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits. 16. Waiver of right to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of substitution to perform adequately. F. Inadequate warranty, vagueness of submittal, failure to meet specified requirements, or submittal 01630-4 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01630-Product Substitution Procedures 120612

of insufficient data will be cause for rejection of substitution request. 1.9 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW A. Within 14 days of receipt of request for substitution, the Architect will accept or reject proposed substitution. B. If a decision on a substitution cannot be made within the time allocated, the product specified shall be used. C. There shall be no claim for additional time for review of proposed substitutions. D. Final acceptance of a substitution submitted prior to the date established for the receipt of bids will be in the form of an addendum. E. Final acceptance of a substitution submitted after the award of the contract will be in the form of a Change Order. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01630-5 01630-Product Substitution Procedures 120612

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 01730 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS A. General procedural requirements governing execution of the Work. 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. B. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: Existence and location of site improvements and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify existence and location of construction affecting the Work. B. Existing Utilities: Existence and location of underground and other utilities indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify existence and location of underground utilities affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and electrical services. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Written Report: Where conditions detrimental to performance of the Work are encountered, provide a written report listing the following: a. Description of the Work. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01730-1 01730-Execution Requirements 120612

b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of need for clarification of Contract Documents, submit a Request For Information (RFI) to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for resolution of the item discovered. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor, registered in the state of California to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 01730-2 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01730-Execution Requirements 120612

4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: Control datum for survey is that established by Owner provided survey. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work. E. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01730-3 01730-Execution Requirements 120612

3.5 INSTALLATION improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain maximum headroom clearance in spaces without a suspended ceiling. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. END OF SECTION 01730-4 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01730-Execution Requirements 120612

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 01732 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original or specified conditions after installation of other work. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Unless specifically shown on the drawings, no structural member shall be cut, drilled, or notched without prior written authorization from the Architect and the Division of the State Architect. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or patching which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. B. Include in request: 1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected work. 3. Necessity for cutting or patching. 4. Description of proposed work, and Products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor. 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01732-1 01732-Cutting and Patching 120612

8. Date and time work will be executed. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Do not cut or patch operating elements that would reduce their capacity to perform or that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. C. Do not cut or patch construction that would result in visual evidence of cutting or patching. D. Remove and replace construction that has been cut or patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering existing Work, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching to complete Work. B. Fit Products together, to integrate with other work. C. Uncover work to install ill timed work. D. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work. E. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 01732-2 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01732-Cutting and Patching 120612

F. Provide openings in the Work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work. G. Cut rigid materials using saw or drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. 3.4 PERFORMANCE A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. B. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. C. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. D. Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. F. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material, to full thickness of the penetrated element. G. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching was performed. B. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, sealant, and similar materials. END OF SECTION CUTTING AND PATCHING 01732-3 01732-Cutting and Patching 120612

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout Procedures. B. Final Cleaning. C. Pest Control. D. Adjusting. E. Demonstration and Instructions. F. Project Record Documents. G. Operation and Maintenance Data. H. Warranties. I. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. J. Commissioning 1.2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review. B. Prepare and submit to Architect a list of items to be completed or corrected, the value of the items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. C. Submit written request to Architect for review of Work. D. Submit warranties, bonds, service agreements, certifications, record documents, maintenance manuals, receipt of spare parts and similar closeout documents. E. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. F. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site. G. Advise Owner of change over in heat and other utilities. H. Provide submittals to Architect that are required by governing or other authorities. I. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. J. Submit affidavit of payment of debts and claims, AIA Document G706. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-1 01770-Closeout Procedures 121912

K. Submit affidavit of release of liens, AIA Document G706A. L. Submit consent of contractor s surety to final payment, AIA Document G707. M. Owner will occupy all portions of the building as specified in Section 01110. 1.3 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final review by Architect. B. Employ experienced professional cleaners for final cleaning. C. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces. D. Vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Shampoo if visible stains exist. E. Clean equipment and plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. F. Clean exposed surfaces of grilles, registers and diffusers. G. Replace filters of operating mechanical equipment. H. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. I. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. J. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. K. Clean light fixtures and replace burned out lamps and bulbs. L. Re-lamp all lamps and bulbs in lighting fixtures. M. Replace defective and noisy ballasts and starters in fluorescent fixtures. N. Leave project clean and ready for occupancy by Owner. 1.4 PEST CONTROL A. Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Submit final report to Architect. 1.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 1.6 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products, systems, and equipment to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of final review. B. For each demonstration submit list of participants in attendance. C. Provide two copies of video tape of each demonstration and instructions session. 01770-2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-Closeout Procedures 121912

D. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. E. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. F. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed upon times, at equipment location. G. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work in contrasting color. 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product Section in contrasting color ink, description of actual Products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Supplier and installer s name and contact information. 3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. E. Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item in contrasting color ink to record actual construction including: 1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 2. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 5. Revisions to electrical circuitry and locations of electrical devices and equipment. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-3 01770-Closeout Procedures 121912

6. Note change orders, alternate numbers, and similar information, where applicable. 7. Identify each record drawing with the written designation of RECORD DRAWING located in prominent location. F. Submit documents to Architect at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Summary: 1. Organize operation and maintenance data with directory. 2. Provide operation and maintenance manuals for products, systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 thru 16 for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Divisions. B. Submit two sets prior to final review, bound in 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch, three ring D size binders with durable vinyl covers. C. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. D. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with laminated plastic tabs. E. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Engineers, Contractor, subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers and manufacturers. F. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: 1. Performance and design criteria. 2. List of equipment. 3. Parts list for each component. 4. Start-up procedures. 5. Shutdown instructions. 6. Normal operating instructions. 7. Wiring diagrams. 8. Control diagrams. 9. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 10. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and 01770-4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-Closeout Procedures 121912

materials. G. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: 1. Shop drawings and product data. 2. Air and water balance reports. 3. Certificates. 4. Warranties. 1.9 WARRANTIES A. Commencement of warranties shall be date of Substantial Completion. B. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. C. Provide duplicate notarized copies in operation and maintenance manuals. D. Execute and assemble documents from subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. E. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in binder with durable plastic cover. F. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. G. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of warranty on the work that incorporates the products. H. Manufacturer's disclaimer and limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturer's, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with Contractor. I. When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction. J. When work covered by warranty has failed and has been corrected, reinstate warranty by written endorsement. Reinstated warranty shall be equal to original warranty with equitable adjustment for depreciation. K. Upon determination that Work covered by warranty has failed, replace or repair Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.10 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections. B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed. C. Obtain signed receipt for delivery of materials and submit prior to request for final review by Architect. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-5 01770-Closeout Procedures 121912

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION 01770-6 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-Closeout Procedures 121912

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 02222 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING A. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures. B. Removal of designated construction. C. Disposal of materials. D. Cap and identify utilities. 1.2 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site. B. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition waste and subsequently deposit in landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Existing to Remain: Items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not indicated to be removed. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for demolition work, safety of structure, electrical disconnection and reconnection dust control and disposal of materials. B. Comply with California Fire Code (CFC), California Code of Regulations, (CCR) Title 24, Part 9, Article 87 - Fire Safety During Construction, Alteration or Demolition of a Building, Section 8706 - Fire Safety During Demolition. C. Obtain required permits from authorities. D. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. E. Do not close or obstruct egress width to exits. F. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 3 day prior written notice to the Owner. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Areas of buildings to be demolished will be evacuated and their use discontinued before start of work. B. Owner will occupy building(s) adjacent to demolition area. Conduct demolition so owner s operation will not be disrupted. C. Provide at least 72 hour notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner s operation. MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02222-1 02222-Minor Demolition for Remodeling 121112

MVEI PROTOTYPE SPECIFICATION 6/01/05 IRVINE, CALIFORNIA D. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits and other adjacent occupied facilities. E. Owner assumes no responsibility for areas of buildings to be demolished. F. Hazardous Materials: It is not anticipated that hazardous materials will be encountered in the work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of work. 2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb. Notify Architect. 3. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials. 4. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under separate contract. 1.5 SEQUENCING A. Owner will conduct salvage operations before demolition begins to remove materials and equipment that the Owner chooses to retain. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Schedule work under provisions of Section 01329. B. Perform work during normal hours of operation. C. Notify Owner in writing 5 days in advance of any required work to be performed on a weekend or holiday. D. Coordinate utility and building service interruptions with Owner. E. Schedule tie-ins to existing systems to minimize disruption. F. Coordinate Work to ensure fire sprinklers, fire alarms, smoke detectors, emergency lighting, exit signs and other life safety systems remain in full operation in occupied areas. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas. B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect. Do not resume operations until directed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Correlate existing conditions with requirements indicated. 02222-2 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02222-Minor Demolition for Remodeling 121912

B. Verify that hazardous waste remediation, if applicable, is complete. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving areas to be demolished. B. Protect existing items which are not indicated to be salvaged, removed, or altered. C. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings. D. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, fumes, noise, and smoke to provide for Owner occupancy as specified in Section 01110. 3.3 DEMOLITION A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas. B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger. Notify Architect. Do not resume operations until directed. C. Maintain protected egress and access to the Work. D. Maintain fire safety during demolition in accordance with CFC, Article 87, Section 8706. E. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Except for items to be reused, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA approved landfill. B. Do not burn or bury materials on site. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt and debris caused by demolition. B. Remove temporary construction. C. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before demolition operations began. END OF SECTION MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02222-3 02222-Minor Demolition for Remodeling 121112

SECTION 02318 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section. B. Section Includes: 1. Excavating, backfilling, and compacting utility trenches such as water, gas,, sewer lines, concrete-encased conduits 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement: Standard Specifications for Public Works construction, current edition except as modified herein. B. Sampling, testing, and certification of imported and/or exported soils shall be performed in accordance with Section 01440. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Information on Drawings not constitute a guarantee of accuracy or uniformity of soil conditions over the Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Bedding material from trench bottom to one foot above the pipe: 1. Sand, gravel, crushed aggregate or native free-draining granular material providing a sand equivalent of at least 30 or a coefficient of permeability greater than 1.4 inches per hour. 2. Sand complying with the Specifications for cement concrete aggregates. B. Backfill Materials: 1. Excavated trench material to be installed for backfilling shall be clean, free of large clods, and stones larger than 2-1/2 inches in any dimension. 2. Cement-sand slurry shall be provided with 1 sack of cement per cubic yard of the mixture. EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES 02318-1 02318-EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES 121912

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL 3. Imported Fill Material: Imported fill material shall be a granular material with sufficient binder to form a firm and stable unyielding subgrade and shall not have more than 60 percent of fines passing a 200 mesh sieve. Material shall provide a coefficient of expansion of not more than 2 percent from air dry to optimum moisture content and not more than 6 percent from air dry to saturation. Imported materials shall be clean and free of rubbish, debris, and toxic or hazardous contaminants. Adobe or clay soils are not permitted. A. Before excavation, contact the "Underground Service Alert of Southern California" (USASC) for information on buried utilities and pipelines. B. Barricade trenches, ditches, pits, sumps, and similar Work outside the barricaded working area with chain link fence as specified in Section 01500: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, and in accordance with Cal-OSHA standards and requirements. C. Saw-cut concrete or bituminous paving for trench installation. D. Trenches over 5 feet in depth shall conform to the Construction Safety Orders of the California Division of Industrial Safety. E. Backfill over excavations to the required elevations with earth, gravel, sand, or concrete and compact as required. Provide excavations free from standing water by pumping, draining, or providing protection against water intrusion. Slope adjacent grades away from excavations to minimize entry of water. F. Do not install piping lengthwise under concrete walks. G. Do not excavate trenches parallel to footings closer than 18 inches from the face of the footing or below a plane having a downward slope of 2 horizontal to one vertical, from a line 9 inches above bottom of footings. 1. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, depth of excavations outside the buildings shall allow for a minimum coverage above top of pipe, tank, or conduit measured from the lowest adjoining finished grade, as follows: Steel Pipe Plastic Pipe (other than waste) Soil, Sewer & Storm Drain 24 inches below finished grade 30 inches below finished grade minimum 18 inches below finished grade, and as required for proper pitch and traffic load. (Install polypropylene sewer pipe with at least 24 inches coverage) 2. Trench width shall provide ample space for fitting and joining. Excavate for piping bells and fittings, bell and spigot pipe and other fittings. EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES 02318-2 02318-EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES 121912

I. Unless indicated otherwise, excavate trenches to the required depths for utilities, such as pipes, and conduit, with minimum allowances of 6 inches at the bottom and 6 inches at the sides for bedding of unprotected piping or as required for concrete encasement of conduits as indicated on Drawings. Grade bottom of trenches to a uniform smooth surface. Remove loose soil from the excavation before installing sand bedding or concrete encasement. J. Provide excavations free from standing water by pumping, draining, or providing protection against water intrusion. If soil becomes soft, soggy, or saturated, excavate to firm undisturbed soil and fill as required. Slope adjacent grades away from excavations to minimize entry of water. K. Provide a minimum clear dimension of 2 inches from sides of wall excavation to outer surfaces of buried pipes or conduits installed in the same trench or outside surfaces of containers and/or tanks. L. Do not install backfill until required inspections and testing is completed. M. Backfill electrical or other excavated utility trenches located outside of barricaded installation areas within 24 hours after inspection by the IOR. N. Install backfill materials in layers not exceeding 4 inches in thickness and compact to 95 percent of the maximum density. O. If materials excavated from the Project site are not permitted for trench backfill in paved areas, backfill trenches with a cement-sand slurry mix. Install backfill to an elevation of the existing undisturbed grade plus one inch. P. Install and compact sand bedding to provide a uniform full length bearing under piping and conduits. Q. Where portions of existing structures, walks, paving, or other improvements are removed or cut for piping or conduit installation, replace the material with equal quality, finished to match adjoining existing improvements. Repair pavement as specified in Section 02765: Pavement Repair. 3.02 IMPORT/EXPORT OF MATERIALS A. Provide fill materials as specified in Part 2- Products. If excavated materials from the Project site are not of required quality or sufficient quantity, import additional materials as necessary. B. Imported fill materials shall be certified for compliance with the requirements of Part 2 of this section. C. Upon completion of import operations, provide the Owner a certification statement attesting that all imported material has been obtained from the identified source site. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Compaction test shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1557, method "C. EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES 02318-3 02318-EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES 121912

3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. 3.05 CLEANUP A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. END OF SECTION EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES 02318-4 02318-EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES 121912

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 07213 BATT INSULATION A. Batt insulation and vapor barrier in exterior wall construction. B. Batt sound insulation in interior walls and partitions. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. B. ASTM C1320 - Installation of Mineral Fiber Batt and Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6. E. Business and Professions Code. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of thermal and moisture barrier at building enclosure elements. B. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of sound control where indicated or scheduled. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Installation of insulation may only commence if insulation meets mandatory manufacturer certification to the California Energy Commission required by Title 24, Part 6, Section 118 of the CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations that insulation complies with Title 20, Chapter 4, Article 3 of the California Quality Standards for Insulating Materials. B. Insulation materials to be certified in compliance with Business and Professions Code Section 19165. C. Insulation manufacturer to be licensed by the California Department of Consumer Affairs, Bureau of Home Furnishing and Thermal Insulation according to Business and Professions Code, Section 19059.7. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturers certificates under provisions of Section 01330 that materials meet or exceed specified regulatory requirements. BATT INSULATION 07213-1 07213-Batt Insulation 121912

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS - INSULATION MATERIALS A. Certain Teed Corp., www.certainteed.com. B. Johns Manville Corp., www.jm.com. C. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation, www.owenscorning.com. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Thermal Batt Insulation: ASTM C665 preformed glass fiber batt, Type III, Class A, with reflective membrane faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less, and a smoke density of 50 or less when tested in accordance ASTM E-84. Category 1 with stapling flanges for attachment of blanket to applicable construction. Equivalent continuous roll membrane facing may be utilized in lieu of individual faced glass fiber batts. Provide R19 at walls. B. Acoustical Batt Sound Insulation, Walls: ASTM C665 preformed glass fiber batt, Type I unfaced, with flame spread of 25 or less, and a smoke density of 450 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Provide [2-1/2] [3-1/2] [6-1/2] inch min. thickness. C. Nails or Staples: Steel wire; electroplated; type and size to suit application. D. Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide. E. Support Wire: 16 gauge steel wire. F. Support Rods: 13 gauge, pointed spring steel length as required for stud spacing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation. B. Verify that enclosed spaces are ventilated to dissipate humidity. C. Maximum relative humidity level of less than 50 percent shall be maintained during installation of insulation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1320. B. Install batt insulation in exterior roof spaces without gaps or voids. C. Install batt sound insulation in interior walls full height of wall. D. Install batt sound insulation above ceilings in areas as indicated. Extend a minimum of 4-0 beyond face of vertical dividing partitions of space to be insulated where partition terminates at ceiling. E. Install batt sound insulation at underside of floor decking between adjacent floor levels. 07213-2 BATT INSULATION 07213-Batt Insulation 121912

F. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. G. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation. Leave no gaps or voids. H. Install with factory applied membrane facing warm side of building spaces. I. Lap ends and side flanges of vapor barrier membrane over face of framing members. J. Extend vapor barrier on to any adjacent construction and tape seal edge of vapor barrier. K. Seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane with tape or another layer of membrane. L. Seal joints in vapor barrier caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor barrier. M. Friction fit sound insulation between studs and fill as required to completely fill space between the wall finishes. END OF SECTION BATT INSULATION 07213-3 07213-Batt Insulation 121912

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces. B. Sealant and backing. 1.2 SUMMARY OF SEALANT LOCATIONS A. Joints in horizontal surfaces. SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS 1. Control and expansion joints in ceramic and quarry tile. 2. Perimeter joints in exterior openings. 3. Joints between ceiling surfaces and frames for doors and windows. 4. Joints in flashing and sheet metal. 5. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures. 6. Acoustical isolation joints between head and sill of walls and floor and ceiling surfaces. 7. Joints between thresholds and floors. 8. Joints between dissimilar materials and those listed above. 9. Other joints as indicated. B. B. Joints in vertical surfaces: 1. Perimeter joints in exterior openings. 2. Joints in flashing and sheet metal. 3. Joints between wall surfaces and door and window frames. 4. Joints between dissimilar materials and those listed above. 5. Other joints as indicated. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds. B. ASTM C919 - Practices for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. C. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. JOINT SEALERS 07900-1 07900-Joint Sealers 121912

D. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. E. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. F. FS TT-S-001657 - Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, solvent Release Type. G. SWRI - (Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330. B. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, and color availability. C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330. D. Submit two samples 4 inches long in size illustrating colors selected. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience, approved by sealant manufacturer. C. Conform to Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) requirements for materials and installation. D. Perform work in accordance with ASTM C1193. E. Perform acoustical sealant application work to provide maximum STC values in accordance with ASTM C919. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. B. Do not install sealant when temperature is less than 40 degrees F. C. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide 5-year warranty under provisions of Section 01770. B. Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air and water seal and exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion or do not cure. 07900-2 JOINT SEALERS 07900-Joint Sealers 121912

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Sealants: 250 g/l. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/l. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/l. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers and their products are listed for each type of sealant. Acceptable manufactures include the following: 1. Dow Corning Corp., www.dowcorning.com. 2. General Electric Co., www.gesealants.com. 3. Pecora Corp., www.pecora.com. 4. Sika Corp., www.sikausa.com. 5. Sonneborn/ChemRex, www.chemrex.com. 6. Tremco Inc., www.tremcosealants.com. 7. W.R. Meadows, Inc., www.wrmeadows.com. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. 2.3 SEALANTS A. Type A - Acrylic Latex: One-part, non-sag, mildew resistant acrylic emulsion compound complying with ASTM C834, Type S, Grade NS, formulated to be paintable. 1. Tremco Inc., Acrylic Latex Caulk. 2. Pecora Corporation, AC-20. 3. Sonneborn, Chemrex, Sonolac. B. Type B - Acoustical Sealant: Single component non-skinning, non-hardening synthetic rubber sealant. 1. Tremco Inc., Tremco CRL Acoustical Sealant JOINT SEALERS 07900-3 07900-Joint Sealers 121912

2. Or approved equal. C. Type C - Silicone Sealant: One-part nonacid-curing silicone sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 1. Dow Corning Corp., Dow Corning 790. 2. General Electric Co., Silpruf. 3. Tremco, Inc., Spectrum 1. 4. Pecora Corp., 864 or 890. 5. Sonneborn/Chemrex, Omniseal. D. Type D - One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 1. Dow Corning Corp., Dow Corning 786. 2. General Electric Co., Sanitary 1700. 3. Tremco, Inc., Tremsil 200. 4. Pecora Corp., 863 or 898 White. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Prime if recommended by manufacturer. B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. 07900-4 JOINT SEALERS 07900-Joint Sealers 121912

C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C1193. E. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G. Tool joints concave. unless otherwise detailed. 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01770. B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect sealants until cured. 3.6 SCHEDULE Type Location Color A. Type A Acrylic Interior joints not To match adjacent Latex Cure otherwise scheduled surfaces B. Type B - Acoustical All interior joints in sound - rated partitions C. Type C - One Exterior openings To match adjacent material Part Nonacid Curing Silicone D. Type D - Interior joints in FRP White Mildew- and at plumbing Resistant fixtures Silicone END OF SECTION JOINT SEALERS 07900-5 07900-Joint Sealers 121912

PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION 08110 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.01 WORK under this section comprises of furnishing and installing hollow metal frames for doors, and hollow metal doors. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SECTIONS A. Section 09900 - Painting 1.04 REFERENCES SPECIFIED A. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. B. UL 10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, CBC 7-2-1997 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. C. UL10B or NFPA 252 at Atmospheric Pressure. D. A1008/A1008M Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Allow and High-Strength Low-Allow with Improved Formability. E. ASTM-A568 General Requirements for Steel, Carbon and High Strength Low Alloy Hot Rolled Strip, and Cold Rolled Sheet. F. ASTM-A924 -General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. G. ANSI A250.8/SDI-100 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & frames. H. ANSI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. I. SDI-107 - Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement Application). J. NFPA-80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Windows. K. NFPA-101 - Life Safety Code. L. ANSI-A250.4 and ANSI-A250.5 -Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance, Steel Doors and Frames. M. ANSI-A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. N. ADA-The Americans with Disabilities Act - Title III - Public Accommodations. O. ANSI-A117.1 - American National Standards Institute - Accessible and Usable Buildings HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-1 08110-Steel Doors and Frames 121912

and Facilities. P. U. L. - Underwriter's Laboratories. Q. ITS - Intertek Testing Service [Warnock Hersey]. R. CBC - California Building Code and Local Codes Including Authority Having Jurisdiction. S. N.F.P.A. 105 - Smoke and draft control assemblies. T. U.L. - 1784 Air leakage test of door assemblies. U. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences across the Specimen. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate door and frame elevations and sections, materials, gages, finishes, fabrication, and erection details, Locations of finish hardware by dimension and locations/details of all openings and louvers. Do not proceed with any fabrication until all details are approved. B. Certification of Compliance: Submit any information necessary to indicate compliance to these specifications. C. Job Close-out: Provide 1 complete manufacturer s catalog to the district locksmith. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All hollow metal doors and frames shall be the product of one (1) manufacturer. Exceptions will not be permitted under any circumstances. B. Certification of label construction: For components exceeding Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)- furnish inspection certificate stating that component construction conforms to UL rating requirements only if architect is aware of such a limitation and has allowed the non-labeled unit. C. Hollow metal manufacture shall be a SDI member. D. The Hollow Metal Manufacturer shall supply doors and frames through a national distribution system as described in 1.06.D herein. Marketing material through a factory direct method will not be acceptable to the district. 1. Successful distributor shall be located within the Southern California area. 08110-2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-Steel Doors and Frames 121912

E. Hollow metal supplier shall be a qualified local direct distributor of products to be furnished. The distributor shall have in their regular employment an AHC and/or CDC with a local business address, telephone and fax line, which will be available at reasonable times through-out the project, to consult with the architect, contractor and district facilities regarding matters affecting the door and frame openings. F. Failure of any hollow metal frame or door to meet specified standards shall be grounds to reject the entire shipment of hollow metal doors and frames, including the hollow metal manufacturer. Items shall be replaced at contractor s expense, including two additional doors for dismantling. No extensions of time or additions to the contract will be allowed due to a rejection of material and substitution of the hollow metal manufacturer. G. Installer requirement: Firm with a minimum of five (5) years experience in the installation of metal doors and frames similar in the type included in this specification. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard wrapped, crated, palletized or otherwise protected during transit and site storage. B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and accepted by the architect. Otherwise remove and replace damaged items. C. Store doors and frames at the building site in a dry, secure place. 1. Place units on minimum 4 inch high wood blocking. 2. Avoid non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create a humidity chamber. 3. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. 4. Provide ¼ inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Deliver all doors and frames to the jobsite in a timely manner so not to delay progress of other trades. B. Issue purchase orders to frame, door and hardware suppliers in sufficient time so as not to interfere with normal quoted delivery of materials. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Hollow metal doors and frames shall be supplied with a one (1) year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. B. Warranty to commence with substantial completion of the job. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-3 08110-Steel Doors and Frames 121912

A. Or Equal, provided products meet the specified performance requirements and are acceptable to the district. Such products are subject to California Public Contracts Code Section 3400. 2.01B and 2.01.C are required. B. Performance criteria as specified in 2.03 will be supported by factory cycle and twist test certification document by an independent lab, and will be included in supplier s shop submittals. Exceptions will not be considered. C. Any proposed substitution will be reviewed by the district facilities, including the district locksmith. Request will be required ten (10) days before bid. Request will require a complete sample of a product as specified herein, and which will become the permanent property of the district. In addition, the district will be furnished a list of a minimum of twenty (20) local [75 mile radius of the district] institutional end-user customers, with facilities locksmith names and telephone numbers. D. Approved Manufacturers: 1. CURRIES, Division of ASSA ABLOY DG, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel requirements, all doors and frames to be manufactured of commercial quality, stretcher leveled flatness, cold rolled steel per ASTM-A1008 and A-568 general requirements or galv. to A60 minimum coating weight standard per ASTM-A924 or A653 hot dip galvanized to A60 minimum coating weight standard. Internal reinforcing may be manufactured of hot rolled pickled and oiled steel per ASTM-A1011. B. Coating Materials Primer: all doors and frames to be bonderized and finished as standard with manufacturer's baked-on primer conforming to ANSI-A250.10. 1. In addition to factory primer, the paint contractor is responsible for a field applied second primer coating. Primer to be equal to primer coating used by the door and frame Manufacturer. 2. Painting contractor to apply two (2) coats of field applied finish coats per specification requirements. 3. Initial field finish coat to be applied after doors are installed. Final coat to be applied after finish hardware templating and pilot holes have been made. 4. Prior to the application of the final field applied finish coat, all surface installed hardware shall be removed, and then carefully reinstalled after the final coat has been applied and dried. Scratches and mars shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the project architect and district. 5. Contractor shall protect door and frame surfaces until job completion and final acceptance by the district. C. Door Core 1. Polystyrene core. All doors to have: a. Non-labeled or labeled doors: polystyrene slab [minimum.24 U factor], self extinguishing, non-toxic in case of fire. b. Permanently bonded to the inside of each face sheet providing rigidity, insulating and sound deadening properties to the door. c. Refer to 2.03 for additional specification 2. Steel ribbed and honeycomb doors are not acceptable, and will not be considered by the district. 08110-4 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-Steel Doors and Frames 121912

2.03 FABRICATION A. General 1. Fabricate all doors and frames in accordance with ANSI A250.8-1998/SDI-100 except where more stringent requirements are specified 2. As detailed on plans, fabricated "welded" frame units to be delivered to jobsite as single units. Transoms, sidelights, and window walls which are "oversize" for transportation and installation shall be furnished with field splices to be field assembled by the contractor. 3. Supply only doors and frames manufactured by the acceptable manufacturer listed in this specification. 4. Doors to be 707T Series as manufactured the Curries Company. 727 Series at Temperature rise rated doors, which indicate Temperature rise 30 Min.-450F degrees maximum or 250F degrees maximum as required by local building code. 5. Prepare doors to receive door hardware per approved schedule, including internal reinforcing. Through-Bolts/SNB are permitted only where approved by the district locksmith and/or facilities supervisor. Do not include unnecessary cutouts in door faces not required by hardware template. B. General 1. Fabricate all doors and frames in accordance with ANSI A250.8-1998/SDI-100 except where more stringent requirements are specified. 2. As detailed on plans, fabricated "welded" frame units to be delivered to job site as single units. Transoms, sidelights, and window walls which are "oversize" for transportation and installation, shall be furnished with field splices to be field assembled by the general contractor. 3. Supply only doors and frames manufactured by the acceptable manufacturer listed in this specification. 4. Doors to be 707 Series as manufactured by the Curries Co, Mason City, IA. 727 Series at Temperature rise rated doors, which indicate Temperature rise 30 Min.-450F degrees maximum or 250F degrees maximum as required by local building code. 5. Prepare doors to receive door hardware per approved schedule, including internal reinforcing. Do not include unnecessary cutouts in door faces not required by hardware template. C. Door Construction 1. Classification: SDI Level III - Model 2 (16GA. doors). 2. Face sheets formed of cold rolled steel. 3. Exterior doors to be galvanized to A60 minimum weight standard. 4. Seamless construction [Equal to Curries 707T] by continuous wire weld of both edges full height of door, and to be done at the factory. 6. Lock edges beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 7. Door lock edge reinforcing shall be one-piece, full height 14GA. Channel. Door hinge edge reinforcing shall be one-piece, full height 12GA. Channel formed and tapped for hinges or as required per listed hardware. 8. Both hinge and lock channels to be welded to each face sheet of the door. 9. Top and bottom channels: a. Not less than 16GA. - flush or inverted. b. Welded to the face sheet. c. Close tops of exterior doors flush by the addition of 16GA. Galvanized. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-5 08110-Steel Doors and Frames 121912

Steel channel fillers. Channel filler to be sealed watertight. 11. All doors to conform to A.N.S.I.-A 250.4 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance. Door size cycle tested to be 4070 to minimum Level A performance for 18 or 16GA. door. Doors will have been subjected to an additional one (1) million cycle and twist tests with a combined two (2) million cycles and 46 twist tests. Testing to be accomplished by an independent lab. Certification of these criteria to be submitted with approval drawings by the supplier. Exceptions will not be considered. D Sound Transmission 757 Door and Frame Assemblies: 1. All STC doors and frames shall be Curries 757 and Frame Assemblies meeting 43 and 45 STC value. 757 Series shall be furnished with Curries STC frame as a complete assembly. 2. Refer to this door and frame specification for other requirements including wire T door edge and full profile frame welding. E. Door Frame Construction 1. Frames shall comply with ANSI/SDI A250.5 Level A, one million cycle swing test performance for a 4070 door frame. 2. All frames to be formed from cold rolled steel. Furnish 14GA. exterior door and window frames and 16GA. interior door and window frames. Both exterior door and window frames to be galvanized to A60 minimum weight standard. a. Where specified, perimeter fence hollow metal door gates/frames to be galvanized to G90 and fabricated per architect s drawings/elevations. 3. All frames are to be Full Profile welded, ground smooth, and re-primed at the welded area. 4. Window frame glass stops shall be minimum 18GA.steel and 5/8" in height. Exterior stops & countersunk flat-head attachment screws to be galvanized. 5. Provide temporary shipping bars to help protect from damage during transit and handling. 6. Temporary shipping bars to be removed before setting frames. 7. All welds on frames to be flush with neatly mitered or butted material cuts. F. Frame Anchors 1. Provide sufficient anchorage to attach to wall in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.5-94 Test Compliance Level A of one million cycles, or anchorage as detailed on plans to specific wall conditions. 2. All frame jamb anchors to be provided: one each jamb per 30 inches of frame height or fraction thereof. Furnish anchors at headers exceeding 48 inches. 3. Floor anchors - angle clip type: a. Minimum 16 GA. b. To receive 2 fasteners per jamb. c. Welded to the bottom of each jamb. G. Hardware Preparation 1. Reinforcements: reinforce components for hardware installation in accord with SDI -107 and ANSI-A115. Provide minimum gauge hardware reinforcing for mortise or surface applied hardware as follows: Hinges - 10 GA. or equivalent number of threads on doors. - 7 GA. on frames for mortise butt hinge type. - 12 GA. full length on frames for continuous hinge. 08110-6 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-Steel Doors and Frames 121912

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SETTING FRAMES Locks - 12 GA. or equivalent number of threads. Panic Devices - 12 GA. Surface Closers - 12 GA. Hold Open Device - 12 GA. 2. Field drilling and/or tapping for surface applied hardware is installation contractor s responsibility. Refer to SDI 107 as a recommended guide for proper reinforcement and installation. a. Lock reinforcement shall be 16 GA. channel type typical of Curries G3 [86] four sided compression resistant design. b. Panic reinforcement to be 14 GA. channel type. c. Closer reinforcement to be 12 GA. channel type. d. Hinge and lock reinforcing on doors to be channel type, continuous from top to bottom of door welded to face sheets. 3. Punch single leaf frames to receive three (3) silencers. Double leaf frames to receive one silencer per leaf at head. 4. Factory prepared hardware locations to be in accord with "Recommended locations for Builder s Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames", as adopted by the Steel Door Institute. A. Set all frames in accord with SDI 122 Installation and Trouble-Shooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames or The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames and Builders Hardware as published by the DHI are recommended guidelines. B. Set welded frames in position prior to beginning partition work. Brace frames until permanent anchors are set. C. Set anchors for frames as work progresses. Install anchors at hinge and strike levels. 3.02 DOOR INSTALLATION A. Install hollow metal doors in frames using hardware specified in Section 08710 Finish Hardware. Doors are to be expertly hung and shall fit snug against all stops. Doors shall fit accurately and hang free from hinge bind with a uniform clearance of 1/8 inch at head and jambs. After hanging, make all adjustments and then remove respective hardware for finish painting. Reinstall hardware after finish painting. B. Maximum clearances at edge of doors: 1. Between door and frame at head and jambs: 1/8 inch. 2. At meeting edges pairs of doors and at mullions: 1/8 inch. 3. At transom panels, without transom bars: 1/8 inch. 4. At sills without thresholds: 5/8 inch max above finish floor. 5. At sills with thresholds: 1/8 inch above threshold. C. Hardware Installation: to be installed securely without marking or defacing hardware or Finish work. Protect finish hardware with suitable protective covering until completion of building. Leave all hardware in perfect working order. Clean and polish. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-7 08110-Steel Doors and Frames 121912

3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Remove dirt and excess sealant, mortar or glazing compounds from exposed surfaces. B. Adjust for smooth operation as required. Install shims as required to allow for proper closing. C. Fill all dents, holes, etc. with metal filler and sand smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces re-prime/paint to match finish. END OF SECTION 08110-8 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-Steel Doors and Frames 121912

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES METAL FRAMING A. Section Includes: Provide gypsum board systems including gypsum board, light gage metal framing, joint treatment, acoustical accessories, and general accessories for complete installation. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07210: Building thermal batt insulation and vapor retarders. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM C754: Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water-Resistant Backing Board. B. ASTM C840: Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Perform gypsum board systems work in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C754 and ASTM C840 unless otherwise specified. 1. Loads: Comply with California Building Code requirements for design of metal framing for gypsum board systems. a. Deflection: Maximum L/240 typical, L/360 where plaster or tile is indicated. 2. Seismic Requirements: Comply with code requirements for seismic bracing. B. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Listed by Underwriter's Laboratory, Gypsum Association (GA) File No's in GA-600 Fire Resistance Design Manual or other listing approved by applicable authorities. C. Systems Responsibility: Provide products manufactured by or recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board to maintain single-source responsibility for system. D. Openings: Obtain dimensions and locations from other trades and provide openings and enclosures for accessories, specialties, equipment, and ductwork. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for framing, insulation, gypsum board, and acoustical accessories. B. Samples: Submit samples of texture coat finish. C. Certificates: 1. Manufacturer s Certification: Furnish manufacturer's certification indicating products comply with Contract Documents and applicable codes. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES METAL FRAMING 09260-1 09260-Gypsum Board Assemblies-Metal Framing 121912

2. Engineering Certification: Furnish certification by structural engineer registered in California indicating compliance with Contract Documents and applicable codes. a. Engineering certification required only where metal framing spans exceed limits included in manufacturer's published tables. b. Calculations: Where requested, submit calculations directly to enforcing agency. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not begin installation of interior gypsum board until space is enclosed, space is not exposed to other sources of water, and space is free of standing water. B. Maintain areas to receive gypsum board at minimum 50 degree F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after application until drying of joint compound is complete; comply with ASTM C840. C. Immediately remove from site gypsum board for interior use exposed to water, including gypsum board with water stains, with signs of mold, and gypsum board with mildew. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. United States Gypsum Co., USG Corp. B. Georgia-Pacific Corp. C. National Gypsum Co. D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Framing Materials: Comply with ASTM C754, 20 gage and lighter, coordinate with Section 05400; where not otherwise indicated, provide gages as recommended by manufacturer for spans and loads indicated and as required by applicable codes. 1. Studs: ASTM C645, screw-type Cee-shaped. 2. Runners: Match studs. 3. Furring Members: ASTM C645, screw-type, hat-shaped. a. Sound Rated Assemblies: Provide resilient channels where indicated and where required to provide required sound transmission classifications. 4. Channels: ASTM C754. 5. Fasteners and Anchorages: As recommended by gypsum board system manufacturer. B. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C840; maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut, tapered edges on boards to be finished. 09260-2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES METAL FRAMING 09260-Gypsum Board Assemblies-Metal Framing 121912

1. Typical: ASTM C1396, 5/8 Type X gypsum board, unless otherwise indicated. 2. First Layer at Double Layer Applications: ASTM C1396 or ASTM C442, 5/8 Type X, gypsum board. 3. Water Resistant Gypsum Board: 5/8 DensArmor Plus by Georgia Pacific. 4. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: DensGlass Gold by Georgia Pacific. C. Gypsum Board Accessories: Comply with ASTM C840. 1. Provide protective coated steel corner beads and edge trim; type designed to be concealed in finished construction by tape and joint compound. 2. Corner Beads: Manufacturer's standard metal beads. 3. Edge Trim: J, "L", "LK", or "LC" casing beads. 4. Reinforcing Tape, Joint Compound, Adhesive, Water, Fasteners: Types recommended by system manufacturer and conforming to ASTM C475. a. Typical Joint Compound: Chemical hardening type for bedding and filling, readymixed or powder vinyl type for topping. b. Water Resistant Gypsum Board: Water-resistant type joint compound. 5. Control Joints: Back to back casing beads. a. Back control joints with 4 mil thick polyethylene air seal. 6. Surface Texture Coat: Manufacturer's standard heavy texture finish, type as selected by Architect. a. Orange Peel Texture: Match USG/Texture II, orange peel effect. D. Acoustical Accessories: 1. Acoustical Insulation: Preformed mineral fiber, ASTM C665, Type I; friction fit type without integral vapor barrier; as required to meet STC ratings indicated, or of thickness indicated. 2. Acoustical Sealant: ASTM C919, type recommended for use in conjunction with gypsum board. a. Type: Paintable, non-shrinking and non-cracking where exposed, nondrying, nonskinning, non-staining, and non-bleeding where concealed. 3. Electrical Box Pads: Provide at outlet, switch and telephone boxes in walls with acoustical insulation. a. Manufacturers for Non-Fire Rated Partitions: 1) Harry A. Lowry & Associates (800.772.2521)/Lowry's Electrical Box Pads. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES METAL FRAMING 09260-3 09260-Gypsum Board Assemblies-Metal Framing 121912

2) Tremco Sheet Caulking (650.572.1656). 3) Fire rated partition material manufacturers. 4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing Erection: Erect metal framing in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Install members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0" in any direction. 2. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs; install runners on each side of opening at frame head height between jamb studs and adjacent studs. 3. Install metal framing backing where required for support of fixtures, cabinets, accessories and hardware. 4. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work which is to be placed in or behind partition framing; allow items to be installed after framing is complete. B. Gypsum Board Installation: Install in accordance with ASTM C840 and manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to furring and to framing. 2. Erect gypsum board with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. a. Ensure joints of second layer do not occur over joints of first layer in double layer applications. 3. For fire rated systems comply with requirements for fire ratings. 4. Place control joints to be consistent with lines of building spaces and as directed by Architect. a. Provide where system abuts structural elements. b. Provide at dissimilar materials. c. Lengths exceeding 30'-0" in partitions. d. Ceiling areas exceeding 50'-0" or 2500 square feet. e. Wings of "L", "U" and "T" shaped ceilings. 5. Place corner beads at external corners; use longest practical lengths. 09260-4 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES METAL FRAMING 09260-Gypsum Board Assemblies-Metal Framing 121912

6. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 7. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, corners and openings to produce surface ready to receive finishes; feather coats onto adjoining surfaces. a. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. 8. Finishing: Comply with Gypsum Association (GA) Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. a. GA Level 4 (Typical): Provide three coat finishing and sanding is required for surfaces indicated to be painted; provide flush, smooth joints and surfaces ready for applied paint finishes. 9. Remove and replace defective work. C. Acoustical Accessories Installation: 1. Place acoustical insulation tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. 2. Place acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter at: a. Metal Framing: One or two beads. b. Base layer and face layer. c. Penetrations of partitions. 3. Tolerance: Maximum 1/4" space between gypsum board at floor, ceiling, and penetrations. 4. Install electrical box pads with pads molded and pressed on back side of box, closing openings, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, for complete acoustical barrier. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES METAL FRAMING 09260-5 09260-Gypsum Board Assemblies-Metal Framing 121912

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical panels. C. Non-fire rated assembly. D. Perimeter trim. 1.2 REFERENCES SECTION 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS A. ASTM A513 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing. B. ASTM A641 - Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. C. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. D. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. E. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Number. F. ASTM E580 - Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustic Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint. G. ASTM E1264 - Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products. H. DSA - Division of the State Architect. I. CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2. J. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories Building Material Directory. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and ceiling panels with five years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with five years minimum documented experience, approved by manufacturer. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to CBC, California Building Code (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 25A for suspension system requirements. B. Suspension system to be acceptable to DSA and have current product acceptance number SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511-1 09511-Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 121112

issued by DSA. C. Conform to applicable UL and CBC combustibility requirements for materials. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330. B. Provide product data on metal grid system components and acoustic units. C. Provide product acceptance approval verification issued by DSA for metal grid system. D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330. E. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size, illustrating material and finish of acoustic units. F. Submit two samples each, 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner, and edge trim. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and humidity of 50 percent prior to, during, and after installation. 1.7 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry. 1.8 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide extra quantity of acoustic units to Owner under provisions of Section 01770. B. Provide quantity equal to 2 percent of units installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Armstrong Ceiling Systems, www.ceilings.com. B. Chicago Metallic Corporation, www.chicago-metallic.com. C. USG Interior Systems, (DONN), www.usg.com. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS A. Grid: ASTM C635, heavy duty, non-fire rated, exposed T; components die cut and interlocking. Catalog numbers of acceptable manufacturer are indicated on drawings. B. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, and edge moldings required for suspended grid system. 09511-2 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511-Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 121112

C. Grid Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating. D. Grid Finish: Off-White or Black color, baked enamel. E. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, to rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components, as detailed on drawings. F. Compression Strut: As detailed on drawings. G. Hanger Wire: ASTM A641, Class 1 coating (galvanized), soft temper, No. 12 gage. 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - ACOUSTIC UNITS A. Armstrong Ceiling Systems, www.ceilings.com. B. USG Interiors, Inc., www.usg.com. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. 2.4 ACOUSTIC UNIT MATERIALS A. Acoustic Panels: ASTM E1264, conforming to the following: 1. Type 1 Equivalent to Ultima, manufactured by Armstrong a. Type : Fine Fissured High-NRC b. Form : 15/16" Exposed tee grid c. Pattern Designation : Fine texture d. Size : 24 x 48 inches e. Thickness : 7/8 inches f. Composition : Mineral g. Light Reflectance : 86 percent h. NRC Range :.75 i. CAC Range : 30 j. Edge : Square k. Surface Color : White l. Flame Spread : (0-25) Class A, UL 25 or under m. Smoke Density : Not to exceed 450 when tested in accordance with CBC Standard No. 8-1 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511-3 09511-Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 121112

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION n. Mold/Mildew Inhibitor : Biocide treatment that inhibits mold and mildew when tested according to ASTM D3273. A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION - GRID SYSTEM A. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636 and ASTM E580 as supplemented in this Section and with notes on the drawing entitled Metal Suspension Systems for Lay In Panel Ceilings. B. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. C. Hang system independent of columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. D. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest effected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. E. Compression struts to be installed at each main runner not exceeding 12'- 0" o.c. in both directions and not more than 8 inches from end of main runner. Insert main 3/4 inch tube over 1/2 inch tube with a minimum 6 inch lap. Secure crimped end of main 3/4 inch tube to structural framing with metal screws and 1/2 inch tube to main runner with metal screws. Secure tube sections together with 2 set screws. Install prefabricated compression post according to manufacturer's recommendations. F. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. G. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. H. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. 3.3 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTIC UNITS A. Field rabbet cut edge of perimeter tiles to match factory rabbeted edge. Paint cut surface if necessary to match surface of tile. B. Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Lay directional patterned units one way in room. Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. 09511-4 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511-Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 121112

3.4 TOLERANCES A. Maintain tolerances in accordance with Section 01450. B. Variation from flat and level surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. C. Variation from plumb of grid members caused by eccentric loads: Two degrees maximum. END OF SECTION SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511-5 09511-Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 121112

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 09639 SEALER/HARDENER CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH A. Applying Sealer/Hardener to concrete floors indicated and burnishing to develop sheen. B. Joint Sealant 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 1: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 779 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces. B. ASTM C 1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method; 1996. C. ASTM G23-81 - Standard Practice for Operating Light - Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) with and without Water Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials. D. ASTM C805 - Standard Test Method for Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01600 Product Requirements. 1. Provide submittal information within 10 calendar days after the contractor has received the Owner s Notice to proceed. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: SEALER/HARDENER CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH 09639-Sealer-Hardener Concrete Floor Finish 121112 09639-1

1. Sealer/Hardener Concrete Finish schedule indicating locations and applications by manufacturer's name and product number. 2. Product Data describing product to be provided, giving manufacturer s name and product name for the specified material proposed to be provided under this section. 3. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 5. Installation methods and procedures, which when approved by the Owner s Representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. 6. Maintenance data to include detailed instructions on recommended cleaning apparatus and cleaning solutions. C. Submittals: For each finish specified submit seven complete sets of manufacturer s latest published product data sheets, test data, maintenance data and material safety data sheets and other safety requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Quality Assurance: 1. Submit manufacturer s certified test reports, prepared by an independent testing laboratory, confirming that products comply with specified performance criteria and are suitable for intended application. B. Applicator's Quality Assurance: Submit list of a minimum of 5 completed projects of similar size and complexity to this Work. Include for each project: 1. Project name and location. 2. Name of owner. 3. Name of contractor. 4. Name of architect. 5. Name of Sealer/Hardener manufacturer. 6. Approximate area of Sealer/Hardener Concrete Finish applied. 7. Date of completion. 8. Applicator shall be Certified Applicator of specified Sealer/Hardener Concrete Floor Finish and familiar with the specified methods needed for proper performance of work of this section. C. Manufacturer's Certification: 1. Provide letter of certification from Sealer/Hardener manufacturer stating that the applicator is a certified applicator of the Ashford Formula and is familiar with proper 09639-2 SEALER/HARDENER CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH 09639-SEALER-HARDENER CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH 121112

1.6 MOCK- UP procedures and installation requirements required by the Manufacturer. A. Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship as required by the Owner s Representative. B. Prepare 10 by 10 foot mock-up for Sealer/Hardener specified, using same materials, tools, equipment, and procedures intended for actual surface preparation and application. C. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship and finish, is approved by the Owner s Representative. D. Retain mock-ups to establish intended standards by which Sealer/Hardener Concrete floor finish system will be judged. E. Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed work if acceptable to the Owner s Representative. 1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene a pre-application meeting before start of application of Sealer/Hardener Concrete Finish. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including Contractor, Owner s Representative, and Certified Applicator. Review the following: 1. Environmental requirements. 2. Surface preparation. 3. Application and Burnishing. 4. Repair. 5. Field quality control. 6. Cleaning. 7. Protection of adjacent surfaces. 8. Coordination with other work and personnel. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original, factory sealed, unopened, new containers bearing manufacturer's name and label intact and legible, with the following information: SEALER/HARDENER CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH 09639-Sealer-Hardener Concrete Floor Finish 121112 09639-3

1. Name or title of material. 2. Manufacturer's standard container drum numbers. 3. Application instructions. 4. Maintain record of container drum numbers. B. Storage: 1. Store materials in protected and well ventilated area at temperatures between 40 and 90 degrees F., unless otherwise required by manufacturer. 2. Keep containers sealed until ready for use. 3. Do not use materials beyond manufacturer s shelf life limits. C. Handling: Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination. D. Empty drums will be retained at jobsite until Manufacturer s Representative verifies the proper amount of material has been used per the Manufacturer s recommendations. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Air and Surface Temperatures: Prepare surfaces and apply and cure coatings within air and surface temperature range in accordance with Sealer/Hardener Manufacturer s instructions. B. Surface Temperature: Minimum of 5 degrees F above dew point. C. Relative Humidity: Not above 85% and surface temperature is at least 5 degrees F above dew point. D. Limitations: Comply with manufacturer s written instructions for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting Sealer/Hardener Concrete Floor Finish performance. E. Close areas to traffic during floor application and after application, for time period recommended by Sealer/Hardener Concrete Floor Finish Manufacturer. 1.10 WARRANTY A. See Division 1 for additional warranty requirements. B. Sealer/Hardener: Manufacturer's and Certified Applicator's Joint Agreement for Twenty (20) year material warranty and Five (5) year labor warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 09639-4 SEALER/HARDENER CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH 09639-SEALER-HARDENER CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH 121112

1. Penetrating Sealer/Hardener Concrete Floor Finish: Ashford Formula, Manufactured by Curecrete Chemical Company; Springville, Utah. 2. Other Sealer/Hardener Concrete Floor Finishes will be acceptable if they meet or exceed the performance test data and meet requirements of the specified Concrete Floor Finish for it s intended use and function as specified herein. B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.2 PENETRATING SEALER/HARDENER CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH A. Product: Ashford Formula. Formulated to permanently seal, dustproof, increase abrasion resistance and develop permanent densification to concrete surfaces to which it is applied. B. Description: Clear liquid form of silicate to permanently seal, dustproof and harden concrete surfaces and provide abrasion resistance by penetrating into concrete pores and chemically reacting. Chemically relies on an internal reaction, leaving no surface film or residue to densify pores. Products containing silicanates, silicones, and magnesium or lithium silicates will not be acceptable and will not be approved. C. Performance Criteria: 1. ASTM C 779, Abrasion: An improvement of 32.5% over untreated samples after 30 minutes. 2. ASTM D 3359, Surface Adhesion: A 22% increase in adhesion over untreated samples, when tested with epoxy. 3. ASTM C39 Compressive Strength. An increase of 40% over untreated samples after seven days. 4. ASTM C 805 Impact Resistance. An increase of 13.3% over untreated samples when tested by Schmidt Hammer. 5. Permeability: Sealed and treated surface allowed a rate of 0.00073oz. (0.022cc) per hour when tested by a 7-foot (2.13 meter) head of water applied to 4.91 square inch (122224.71mm) area. 6. ASTM C 1028 Friction: No less than 0.86 result of coefficient of friction on sealed and treated dry surfaces and no less than 0.69 result of coefficient of friction on sealed and treated wet surfaces. 7. ASTM G 23 Light Exposure. No adverse effects on sealed and treated samples. 8. TTM-59, Chemical Resistance: No effect when exposed to alcohols, amines, alkaline detergents, ethers, Halogenated hydrocarbons, hydrocarbons, hydraulic fluids, ketones, oils and fuels. Moderate chemical resistance to some inorganic and organic acids. D. Manufacturer s Technical Representative available to make site visits if requested by Owner s Representative. SEALER/HARDENER CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH 09639-Sealer-Hardener Concrete Floor Finish 121112 09639-5

E. Sealer/Hardener Concrete Finish: 1. First Coat: Ashford Formula applied at 200 SF per gallon. Apply at the time of cure to freshly finished concrete, immediately following the trowel operation and the soft cutting of the joints. Ashford Formula may be used in conjunction with compatible curing methods if approved by the Sealer/Hardener Manufacturer. 2. Spiff Coat: Ashford Formula applied at 1000 SF per gallon. Apply at the end of the project after the final clean of the floor and prior to racking. Allow 24 hour cure and follow with high speed propane burnishing in accordance with the manufactures. 2.3 JOINT SEALANT A. Product: Crete Fill by Curecrete of Springville, Utah,1.800.366.2254. B. Color: Concrete Gray. C. Polyurea Joint sealant, (non-staining) must meet specification requirements for compatibility with Sealer/Hardener Concrete Finish as recommended by manufacturer of concrete Sealer/Hardener. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with certified applicator (installer) present, for conditions affecting performance of Sealer/Hardener Concrete Finish. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared and the floor surfaces are free of construction materials and foreign contaminants that will inhibit penetration of Sealer/Hardener and performance. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Owner s Representative of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION OF CONCRETE FLOORS A. General: 1. Remove curing, sealing, adhesive, and coating agents, oil, breaking compound residue, wax and grease by scraping off heavy deposits mechanically or chemically to assure penetration of product into surface. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water. 2. Remove dust and loose material by brushing, sweeping, vacuuming, and blowing with high pressure air. 3. Remove paint residue with solvent/stripper provided the stripper does not have an acidic ph. 4. Remove tire marks or any residue with compatible non-acidic degreaser or stripper as recommended by manufacturer. Mix proper dilution so that the chemical does not etch and open the pores of the concrete. Follow manufacturer's detailed instructions prior to 09639-6 SEALER/HARDENER CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH 09639-SEALER-HARDENER CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH 121112

mixing and removal. 5. Power rinse entire floor surface to thoroughly rinse and remove all soap residue or contaminants. Squeegee dry. B. Grind protrusions flush with surface. Patch voids, holes and cracks with recommended Cementitious patching material compatible with Sealer/Hardener Concrete Floor Finish C. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, dirt, dust, adhesives, and all other contaminants. D. Protect surrounding and adjacent surfaces in manner recommended by Sealer/Hardener Concrete Finish Manufacturer. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General 1. Apply Sealer/Hardener Concrete Finish in strict accordance with Manufacturer s latest printed instructions. Utilize manufacturer s recommended equipment for installation. Use low pressure drum pump with high volume sprayer or pour from drums or pails to flood surface during first coat application. Pump up sprayer maybe used for applying spiff coat following manufacturer s recommended procedures. 2. Application is to take place prior to any in-store accessory installation or as scheduled and coordinated by the Owner s Representative thus allowing as complete and uninhibited concrete slab area for installation. 3. Only Manufacturer s Certified Applicator may apply Sealer/Hardener Concrete Finish. Applicable procedures must be followed as recommended by the Manufacturer. 4. Manufacturer s Certified Applicator to install specified Sealer/Hardener Concrete Finish in strict accordance with manufacturer s recommended procedures for each application as specified herein. 5. Comply with recommendations of product manufacturer for drying time between succeeding coats. 6. Recoat sealed floors where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to ensure a finish coat free of other defects due to insufficient sealing or sheen. Apply additional Ashford Formula if required by Sealer/Hardener Concrete Finish Manufacturer or Owner s Representative. 7. Remove defective floor areas visible and unacceptable to Sealer/Hardener Manufacturer or Owner's Representative in accordance with Sealer/Hardener Concrete Finish as specified herein. 8. Make edges of Sealer/Hardener Concrete Finish adjoining other materials clean and sharp. 9. Achieve water repellent surface, hardening, dust-proofing, and abrasion resistance of concrete surfaces without changing the natural appearance of the concrete, except for the sheen. SEALER/HARDENER CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH 09639-Sealer-Hardener Concrete Floor Finish 121112 09639-7

10. After spiff coat has been applied, burnish with High speed propane burnisher capable of a minimum of 2700 rpm equipped with a black stripping pad, followed by a purple pad and a blue burnishing pad or a hog s hair pad to develop sheen. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Manufacturer's representative must be available to provide technical assistance and guidance for surface preparation and application of Sealer/Hardener Concrete Finish. B. Sealer/Hardener Concrete Finish shall be inspected and acceptable to the Owner s Representative or the Manufacturer of Sealer/Hardener Concrete Finish. Any area that is found unacceptable shall be repaired by the Certified Applicator as deemed necessary. 3.5 WORKMANSHIP AND CLEANING A. The premises shall be kept clean and free of debris at all times. B. Touch-up and restore finish where damaged. C. Remove spilled, splashed or splattered finish material from all surfaces, as required. D. Do not mar surface finish or item being cleaned. Make necessary repairs to damaged surfaces caused by cleaning operation or installation of Sealer/Hardener Concrete Finish. E. Remove debris from Jobsite. Dispose of materials in separate, closed, sealed containers in accordance with local regulations 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect and Prohibit traffic on Sealer/Hardener Concrete Finished Work according to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Barricade areas to protect Ashford Formula spiff coat until properly cured for traffic according to manufacturer s instructions and recommendations. C. Refer to Manufacturer for materials used to cover and protect the flooring surfaces. Do not apply any Tape to the floor as it will etch concrete surfaces. END OF SECTION 09639-8 SEALER/HARDENER CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH 09639-SEALER-HARDENER CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH 121112

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient tile flooring. B. Resilient self coved base. 1.2 REFERENCES SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING A. ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. B. CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California State Accessibility Standards. C. ASTM D2047 - Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine. D. ASTM E648 - Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems using a Radiant Energy Source. E. ASTM E662 - Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. F. ASTM F710 - Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors and other Monolithic Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. G. ASTM F1066 - Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. H. ASTM F1344 - Specification for Rubber Floor Tile. I. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base. J. ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. K. FS RR-T-650 - Treads, Metallic and Non-metallic, Non-skid. L. FS SS-T-312b - Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl, Vinyl Composition. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Resilient flooring to comply with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below: 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq cm or more per ASTM E648. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E662. B. Products supplied for tile installation shall comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-1 09650-Resilient Flooring 122112

organic compounds (VOC). C. Resilient flooring products shall have a coefficient of friction when tested according to ASTM D2047 of 0.60 for flat floors and 0.80 for ramped surfaces. D. Conform to CBC, California Building Code, (CCR) Title 24, Part 2, and ADAAG for accessibility requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330. B. Provide seaming and pattern plan. C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330. D. Submit two samples 3 x 3 inches in size, illustrating color and pattern for each floor material specified. E. Submit two 2 inch long samples of base and stair material for each material specified. F. LEED Submittal: Credit EQ 4.1, submit manufacturer s product data for adhesives including printed statement of VOC content under the provisions of Section 01352. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit cleaning and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01770. B. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Concrete subfloor to be allowed to cure for a minimum of 90 days to achieve acceptable dryness. B. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. C. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. D. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Moisture emission rate of no more than 3 lb/1000 sq. ft./24 hours when tested by Quantitive Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test, ASTM F1869, with subfloor temperature not less than 65 degrees F. E. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: A ph range of between 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable water and phdrion paper is applied. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 100 sq ft of flooring and 50 lineal feet of base of each material specified under provisions of Section 01770. 09650-2 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-Resilient Flooring 122112

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS - SHEET FLOORING A. Armstrong World Industries, www.armstrongfloors.com. B. Azrock, www.domco.com. C. Congoleum, www.congoleum.com. D. Tarkett, www.tarkettsommerusa.com. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS - VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING A. Amtico Flooring Division, www.amtico.com. B. Armstrong World Industries, www.armstrongfloors.com. C. Azrock Industries, Inc., www.domco.com. D. Tarkett, www.domcotarkettcommercial.com. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. 2.3 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING MATERIALS A. Vinyl Composition Tile: ASTM F1066, Class 2; 12 x 12 inch size, 1/4 inch thick; plain design. B. Pattern equivalent to Imperial Texture Standard Excelon manufactured by Armstrong. C. Roppe Corporation, www.roppe.com. D. R.C. Musson Rubber Co., Inc., www.mussonrubber.com. E. R.C.A. Rubber Co., www.rcarubber.com. F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. 2.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BASE MATERIALS A. Allstate Rubber Corporation, www.muchocolors.com. B. Armstrong World Industries, www.armstrongfloors.com. C. Burke Flooring Products, www.burkemercer.com. D. Flexco Company, www.flexcofloors.com. E. Johnsonite, www.johnsonite.com. F. R.C. Musson Rubber Co., Inc., www.mussonrubber.com. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-3 09650-Resilient Flooring 122112

G. Roppe Corporation, www.roppe.com. H. VPI, LLC; www.vpiflooring.com. I. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. 2.5 BASE MATERIALS A. Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber; Group 1 solid; Style B coved; 4 inch high; 0.125 inch thick; top set, in maximum practical lengths. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. Shall meet South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168. C. Edge Strips: Rubber. D. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer. Coordinate selection of floor wax with Owner's maintenance program. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710 and are as specified herein. B. Verify concrete floors exhibit acceptable moisture emission rate; exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. C. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat and are ready to receive Work. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler.1 B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured. D. Vacuum clean substrate. E. Apply primer to concrete slab surfaces if recommended by flooring manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION - TILE MATERIAL A. Install in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent. 09650-4 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-Resilient Flooring 122112

C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. E. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines. F. Install tile [o pattern indicated on drawings. G. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. H. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates. I. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. J. Install flooring in pan type floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern. K. Install flooring under movable partitions and under cabinetry without interrupting floor pattern. L. Install flooring in open cabinet recesses. M. Install feature strips, edge strips, and floor markings where indicated. Fit joints tightly. 3.4 INSTALLATION - BASE MATERIAL A. Fit joints tight and vertical. B. Install material in maximum practical lengths. C. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints. D. Miter internal corners. E. Field wrap external corners with longest practical lengths. "V" cut back surface to 2/3 its thickness. F. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces. G. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation. 3.6 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean, seal, wax, and polish floor and base surfaces. END OF SECTION RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-5 09650-Resilient Flooring 122112

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: SECTION 09771 FIBER REINFORECED PLASTIC PANELS 1. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panels. 2. Panel moldings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for panels and accessories. B. Submit two samples 4 x 4 inches in size illustrating panel pattern and color. Submit two 12 inch long samples of panel moldings. C. Submit manufacturer s installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330. D. Submit maintenance data: to include manufacturer s recommendation for cleaning and stain removal. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to flame/smoke developed rating of 25/450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install fiberglass reinforced plastic panels when temperatures are below 60 degrees F or above 90 degrees F. B. Maintain temperature range for 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours after installation of panels. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide one year warranty. B. Include coverage for surface staining and finish deterioration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Glasteel Inc., www.glasteel.com. B. Kemlite Co., www.kemlite.com. FIBER REINFORECED PLASTIC PANELS 09771-Fiber Reinforced Plastic Panels 121112 09771-1

C. Lasco Products, www.lascoboard.com. D. Marlite, www.marlilte.com. E. Nudo Products, Inc., www.nudo.com. F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass reinforced plastic panels of 0.090 inch thickness in 4 x 8 foot sheet sizes. B. Panels to have embossed surface finish in color selected by Architect. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Moldings: Extruded aluminum or plastic panel accessories in maximum practical lengths. Finish to match panels. Provide all required accessories and trims for complete, finished installation. B. Adhesive: Latex based non-flammable construction adhesive. C. Sealant: Silicone sealant. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and openings are ready to receive work. B. Verity that field measurements and tolerances are as instructed by manufacturer. C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use. D. Beginning of installation constitutes acceptance of existing substrate surface conditions by installer. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces. B. Protect elements of work adjacent to work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install panels and accessories in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. B. Coordinate location of panel joints to minimize interference with fixtures and accessories. C. Apply panel adhesive at 6 inches on center over entire field of panel. D. Set panel ends and edges in moldings. 09771-2 FIBER REINFORECED PLASTIC PANELS 09771-FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 121112

E. Seal moldings and panel joints with sealant. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Panels shall lay flush with substrate, without air pockets or warpage. B. Remove and replace panels not conforming to manufacturers installation guidelines. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean all work prior to substantial completion. 3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Division 01. END OF SECTION FIBER REINFORECED PLASTIC PANELS 09771-Fiber Reinforced Plastic Panels 121112 09771-3

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Products and application. C. Surface finish schedule. 1.2 REFERENCES SECTION 09900 PAINTING A. ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. B. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Preparation of all surfaces to receive final finish. B. Painting and finishing work of this section using coating systems of materials including primers, sealers, fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. C. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shoppriming and surface treatment specified under other Sections. D. Painting and finishing all exterior and interior surfaces of materials including structural, mechanical, and electrical work on site, in building spaces, and above or on the roof. E. Paint exposed surfaces except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with five years experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with five years documented experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction including those having jurisdiction over airborne emissions and industrial waste disposal. PAINTING 09900-1 09900-Painting 122112

Where those requirements conflict with this specification, comply with the more stringent provisions. B. Comply with the current applicable regulations of the California Air Resources Board (CARB) and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). C. Comply with South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113. A copy of this regulation can be obtained from http://www.aqmd.gov/rules/reg/reg11/r1113.pdf. D. Coats: The number of coats specified is the minimum number acceptable. If full coverage is not obtained with the specified number of coats, apply such additional coats as are necessary to produce the required finish. E. Employ coats and undercoats for all types of finishes in strict accordance with the recommendations of the paint manufacturer. F. Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coat. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330. B. Provide manufacturer's technical information and instructions for application of each material proposed for use by catalog number. C. List each material by catalog number and cross-reference specific coating with specified finish system. D. Provide manufacturer's certificate that products proposed meet or exceed specified materials. E. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330. F. Submit two samples 8-1/2 x 11 inches in size of each paint color and texture applied to cardboard. Resubmit samples until acceptable color, sheen and texture are obtained. G. On same species and quality of wood to be installed, submit two 4 x 8 inch samples showing system to be used. H. LEED Submittal: Credit EQ 4.2, submit manufactures product data for paints and coatings, including printed statement of VOC content and chemical components under the provisions of Section 01352. 1.8 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide field samples under provisions of Section 01330. B. On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components, duplicate specified finishes on at least 100 sq.ft. of surface area. C. Provide full-coat finishes until required coverage, sheen, color and texture are obtained. D. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of field samples. E. After finishes are accepted, the accepted surface may remain as part of the work and will be 09900-2 PAINTING 09900-Painting 122112

used to evaluate subsequent coating systems applications of a similar nature. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site and store and protect under provisions of Section 01600. B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance. C. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. Paint containers not displaying product identification will not be acceptable. D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain interior surface and ambient temperatures above 50 degrees F with a maximum humidity level of 50 percent for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 50 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Urethane Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 feet candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Provide a one gallon unopened container of each color and surface texture to Owner. B. Label each container with color, texture, and room locations in addition to the manufacturer's label. 1.12 WARRANTY A. All Deep Tone colors shall be warranted for 5-year color retention with a delta loss of no more than 75 cie lab units. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - PAINT A. Unless specifically identified otherwise, product designations included at end of section are those of the Dunn-Edwards Corporation, www.dunnedwards.com and shall serve as the PAINTING 09900-3 09900-Painting 122112

standard for kind, quality, and function. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, other manufacturers offering equivalent products are: 1. Benjamin Moore Paints, www.benjaminmoore.com. 2. Frazee Paint (McCloskey, Ameron), www.frazeepaint.com. 3. ICI Paint Stores, www.iciduluxpaints.com. 4. Kelly-Moore Paint Company, www.kellymoore.com. 5. Pittsburgh Paints, www.ppg.com. 6. Sherwin Williams, www.sherwin-williams.com. 7. Spectra-Tone Paint Corp., www.spectra-tone.com. 8. Tnemec Company, Inc., www.tnemec.com. 9. Vista Paint Corporation, www.vistapaint.com. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - MULTICOLORED PAINT COATING A. Bollen International, Inc., (Crafton), www.bolleninternational.com. B. Dunn-Edwards Corporation (Multispec), www.dunnedwards.com. C. Textured Coatings of America (Tex-Cote), www.texcote.com. D. Trikes (Polomyx and Zolatone), www.zolatone.com. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CERAMIC EPOXY COATING A. CeRam-Cote Products, www.ceram-cote.com. B. Tnemec Company, Inc. www.tnemec.com. C. Vitrocem, www.vitrocem.com. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. B. Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. C. Deep Tone colors to be composed of 100 percent acrylic pigments, factory ground, with a colored base. 09900-4 PAINTING 09900-Painting 122112

D. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality. E. Chemical Components of Interior Paints and Coatings: Shall not exceed the limitations of Green Seal s Standard GS-11 for VOC content and the following restrictions: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/l. 2. Non-Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/l. 3. Anticorrosive Coatings: VOC content of not more than 250 g/l. 4. Varnishes and Sanding Sealers: VOC content of not more than 350 g/l. 5. Stains: VOC content of not more than 250 g/l. 6. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 7. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. l. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Ethylene Glycol o. Formaldehyde. p. Hexavalent chromium. PAINTING 09900-5 09900-Painting 122112

2.5 FINISHES q. Isophorone. r. Lead. s. Mercury. t. Methyl ethyl ketone. u. Methyl isobutyl ketone. v. Methylene chloride. w. Naphthalene. x. Toluene (methylbenzene). y. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. z. Vinyl chloride. A. Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finish schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry : 12 percent. 3. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. 4. Exterior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Remove all finish hardware from doors and frames prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. C. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. 09900-6 PAINTING 09900-Painting 122112

D. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes. E. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. F. Aluminum Surfaces: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning. G. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. H. Gypsum Board: Repair all voids, nicks, cracks and dents with patching materials and finish flush with adjacent surface. Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair. I. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Pretreat with phosphoric acid etch or vinyl wash. Apply coat of etching primer the same day as pretreatment is applied. J. Uncoated Steel and Iron: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint after repairs. K. Shop Primed Steel: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime paint steel surfaces. L. Existing surfaces to be recoated shall be thoroughly cleaned and de-glossed by sanding or other means prior to painting. Patched and bare areas shall be spot primed with same primer as specified for new work. 3.3 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT WORK A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section. C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces. D. Remove empty paint containers from site. 3.4 WORK NOT TO BE PAINTED A. Painting is not required on surfaces in concealed and inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation spaces, utility tunnels, pipe spaces and duct shafts. B. Do not paint metal surfaces such as stainless steel, chromium plate, brass, bronze, and similar finished metal surfaces. C. Do not paint anodized aluminum or other surfaces which are specified to be factory prefinished. D. Do not paint sandblasted or architecturally finished concrete surfaces. PAINTING 09900-7 09900-Painting 122112

E. Do not paint prefinished acoustic materials or acoustic suspension systems. F. Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code required labels or identifications. 3.5 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. C. Apply prime coat to surfaces which are to be painted or finished. D. Apply each coat to uniform finish. E. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. F. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. G. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. H. The number of coats specified is the minimum that shall be applied. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final paint coat, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. I. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. J. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint. K. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. L. Paint mill finished door seals to match door or frame. M. Paint primed steel glazing stops in doors to match door or frame. N. Cloudiness, spotting, lap marks, brush marks, runs, sags, spikes and other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. O. Where spray application is used, apply each coat of the required thickness. Do not double back to build up film thickness of two coats in one pass. P. Where roller application is used, roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of roller laps, irregularity of texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. 3.6 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Paint shop primed equipment. Do not paint shop prefinished items. B. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. C. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, 09900-8 PAINTING 09900-Painting 122112

hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are prefinished. D. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally. E. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and connector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and connector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. F. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas. G. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. H. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing. I. Paint grilles, registers, and diffusers which do not match color of adjacent surface. J. Paint all mechanical and electrical equipment, vents, fans, and the like occurring on roof. K. Do not paint moving parts of operating units; mechanical or electrical parts such as valve operators; linkages; sensing devices; and motor shafts. L. Do not paint over labels or equipment identification markings. M. Do not paint mechanical room specialties such as compressors, boilers, pumps, control panels, etc. N. Do not paint switch plates, light fixtures, and fixture lenses. 3.7 CLEANING A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. 3.8 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01600. B. Erect barriers and post warning signs. Maintain in place until coatings are fully dry. C. Confirm that no dust generating activities will occur following application of coatings. 3.9 PATCHING A. After completion of painting in any one room or area, repair surfaces damaged by other trades. B. Touch-up or re-finish as required to produce intended appearance. PAINTING 09900-9 09900-Painting 122112

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01458. B. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary. C. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample paint material being used. D. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. E. The testing agency will perform appropriate quantitive materials analysis and other characteristic testing of materials as required by the Owner. F. If test results show materials being used and their installation do not comply with specified requirements or manufacturer's recommendations, the Contractor may be directed to stop painting, remove noncomplying paint, pay for testing and repaint surfaces to acceptable condition. 3.11 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Paint and finish colors shall be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's entire range of standard and custom color selections and special colors selected to match or compliment the colors of other materials, equipment, or components which comprise the work. B. Access doors, registers, exposed piping, electrical conduit and mechanical/electrical panels: Generally the same color as adjacent walls. C. Exterior and interior steel doors, frames and trim: Generally a contrasting color to adjacent walls. D. Doors generally are all the same color, but of a contrasting color from frame and trim. E. Exterior and interior steel fabrications: Generally a contrasting color to adjacent walls. F. Exposed interior mechanical/ductwork: Generally a contrasting color to adjacent walls or ceiling. G. Ceilings are generally to be painted a different color than walls. H. Approximately 20 percent of overall painting work will be required to be "Deep Tone" colors. This work will require one additional coat of paint beyond that as specified. 3.12 SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES A. Steel - Primed or Unprimed (Semi-Gloss Acrylic) 1st coat: 2nd coat: 3rd coat: GAPR00 Galv-Alum Premium or BRPR00-1 Bloc-Rust Premium SSHL50 Spartashield Semi Gloss SSHL50 Spartashield Semi Gloss 09900-10 PAINTING 09900-Painting 122112

B. Steel - Galvanized (Semi-Gloss Acrylic) 1st coat: 2nd coat: 3rd coat: 4th coat: SCME01 Supreme Chemical Metal Etch GAPR00 Galv-Alum Premium or UGPR00 Ultra-Grip Premium SSHL50 Spartashield Semi Gloss SSHL50 Spartashield Semi Gloss C. Wood - Painted (Semi-Gloss Acrylic) 1st coat: 2nd coat: 3rd coat: W708 EZ Prime W7500 Spartaglo W7500 Spartaglo 3.13 SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES A. Wood - Painted (Semi-Gloss Acrylic) 1st coat: 2nd coat: 3rd coat: UGPR00 Ultra-Grip Premium SPMA50 Suprema Semi Gloss SPMA50 Suprema Semi Gloss B. Steel - Primed or Unprimed (Semi-Gloss Acrylic) 1st coat: 2nd coat: 3rd coat: BRPR00-1 Bloc-Rust Premium SPMA50 Suprema Semi Gloss SPMA50 Suprema Semi Gloss C. Gypsum Board (Flat Acrylic) 1st coat: 2nd coat: 3rd coat: VNPR00 Vinylastic Premium SWLL10 Spartawall Flat SWLL10 Spartawall Flat D. Gypsum Board (Semi-Gloss Acrylic) 1st coat: 2nd coat: 3rd coat: VNPR00 Vinylastic Premium SPMA50 Suprema Semi Gloss SPMA50 Suprema Semi Gloss END OF SECTION PAINTING 09900-11 09900-Painting 122112

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plastic/acrylic signs. 1.2 REFERENCES SECTION 10400 IDENTIFYING DEVICES A. CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2. B. ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01330. B. Submit shop drawings listing sign styles, lettering and locations, spacing and installation method. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to CBC - California Building Code, (CCR), Title 24, Part 2 and ADAAG for accessibility requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Package signs, labeled in name groups. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesive mounted signs when ambient temperature is below 70 degrees F. Maintain this minimum during and after installation of signs. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acrylic Signs: 1. Architectural Sign Identity, (909) 654-4350. No URL available. 2. ASI - Modulex, www.asimodulex.com. 3. Best Manufacturing, www.bestsigns.com. 4. Bravo Sign and Design, www.bravosign.com. IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10400-1 10400-Identifying Devices 121912

5. CA Signs, www.casigns.com. 6. Mohawk Sign Systems, www.mohawksign.com. 7. Neiman and Company, (818) 764-3660. No URL available. 8. Southwell Company, www.southwellco.com. 9. Vomar Products, Inc., www.vomarproducts.com. 10. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Room Control Signage: Mohawk Sign Systems, Series 200A, Format D Sand Carved Process, with 1/32 inch raised border and letters with integral California round top contracted Grade 2 Braille dots 1/10 inch on center with 2/10 inch between cells and raised a minimum of 1/ 40 inch. Material shall be 1/8 inch thick x 2 inch high MP plastic plate of length required with 1 inch high Avant Garde lettering; mechanical mounting with copy centered on plate. Provide signs at locations shown on the drawings. Signage to be in compliance with the requirements of Article 703 of the ADAAG and CBC, California Building Code, (CCR) Title 24, Part 2, Section 1117B.5. B. Tactile Exit Signage: Mohawk Sign Systems, Series 200A, Format D Sand Carved Process, with 1/32 inch raised border and letters with integral California round top contracted Grade 2 braille dots 1/10 inch on center with 2/10 inch between cells and raised a minimum of 1/ 40 inch. Material shall be 1/8 inch thick x 6 inch high MP plastic plate of length required with 1 inch high Avant Garde lettering; mechanical mounting with copy centered on plate. Provide signs at locations shown on the drawings. Signage to be in compliance with the requirements of Article 703 of the ADAAG and CBC, California Building Code, (CCR) Title 24, Part 2, Section 1003.2.8.6.1 and 1117B.5. C. Pictorial Symbol Signage: Mohawk Sign Systems, Series 200A, Format D Sand Carved Process, with 1/32 inch raised border and letters with integral California round top contracted Grade 2 Braille dots 1/10 inch on center with 2/10 inch between cells and raised a minimum of 1/ 40 inch. Material shall be 1/8 inch thick MP plastic plate of size indicated with lettering and symbols as indicated; mechanical mounting with copy centered on plate. Provide sign in locations shown on the drawings. Signage to be in compliance with the requirements of Article 703 of the ADAAG and CBC, California Building Code, (CCR) Title 24, Part 2, Section 1117B.5. D. Entrance and Restroom Signage: 1. Restroom Doors: Acrylic plastic signs equivalent to that as detailed on the drawings; 12 inch circle and triangle with international symbol of accessibility in accordance with CBC, California Building Code, (CCR), Title 24, Part 2, Section 1115B.5 and 1117B.5.7. 2. Building Entrance: Equivalent to Model No. RFH55D, 5 inch square, reflective decal, RFH55P, 5 inch square, reflective plastic accessible sign in accordance with CBC, California Building Code (CCR), Title 24, Part 2, Section 1127B.3; as manufactured by Flags and Banners Unlimited. E. Exterior Directional Signage: 0.0598 inch thick galvanized sheet steel sign of size indicated. Paint with reflectorized paint. Graphics and text to be as indicated. Mount sign to wall with four countersunk vandal resistant screws or n free standing 2-inch diameter standard weight galvanized steel pipe post as indicated. Signs shall be in conformance with Title 24, Part 2, 10400-2 IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10400-Identifying Devices 121912

Section 1117B.5.1.3. F. Accessories: Provide all anchors, adhesives, and accessories for a complete installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install true, plumb, level and adequately secured to substrate. C. Clean and polish. END OF SECTION IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10400-3 10400-Identifying Devices 121912

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet and washroom accessories. B. Framed mirror units. SECTION 10810 TOILET ACCESSORIES C. Concealed anchor devices and backing plate reinforcements furnished to other Sections. D. Attachment hardware. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. B. CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California State Accessibility Standards. C. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips. D. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. E. ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. F. ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. G. ASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. H. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330. B. Provide product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330. 1.4 KEYING A. Supply two keys for each accessory to Owner. B. Master key all accessories. TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810-1 10810-Toilet Accessories 121912

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to CBC, California Building Code, (CCR) Title 24, Part 2, and ADAAG for accessibility requirements. B. Structural strength of grab bars, shower seats, fasteners and mounting devices shall conform to requirements of the CBC, California Building Code, (CCR) Title 24, Part 2, Section 1115B.8.3 and shall withstand the application of a 250 lb. point load. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work of this Section under provisions of Section 01310. B. Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., www.bobrick.com. B. American Specialties, Inc. (ASI), www.americanspecialties.com. C. Bradley Corporation, www.bradleycorp.com. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304. C. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel, Type 304. D. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type waterproof. E. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamperproof. F. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. C. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. E. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. 10810-2 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810-Toilet Accessories 121912

F. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. G. Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices. H. Toilet tissue dispensers located in accessible toilet rooms or stalls shall not have their flow restricted and shall be capable of continuous flow. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 to 1.25 oz/sq yd. B. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. C. Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats electrostatic baked enamel. D. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, Type SC 2 satin finish. E. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish. F. Mirror Glass: FS DD-G-451 Type I, Class 1, Quality of 2, 1/4 inch thick with silver coating, copper protective coating and non metallic paint coating complying with FS DD-M-411. G. Stainless Steel Mirror: Type 430, 20 gage, bright annealed stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate time for building-in. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Accessories required to be accessible shall be mounted at heights according to CBC Section 1115B.9 and as indicated on the drawings. D. Toilet paper dispensers and feminine napkin dispensers located on the grab bar side of an accessible toilet room or stall shall not project more than3 inches from the finished surface of the wall nor be located closer than 1-1/2 inches clear of the tangent point of the grab bar. TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810-3 10810-Toilet Accessories 121912

3.4 SCHEDULE A. Basis of Design: Model numbers refer to Bobrick, Inc. products 1. Grab bars: #B-5806x36 at rear of water closet & #B-5806x48 at side. 2. Channel frame mirrors: #B-290 24x36 3. Recessed paper towel and waste receptacles: #B-3942 4. Surface mounted seat cover dispenser: #B-221 5. Surface mounted horizontal soap dispenser: #B-2111 6. Recessed toilet tissue dispenser & sanitary napkin disposal: #B-3094 END OF SECTION 10810-4 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810-Toilet Accessories 121912

SPECIFICATION 13965 CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONVENTIONAL DETECTION AND CONTROLS Integrated Business Continuity Systems Part 1. General 1.1 SCOPE A. This specification outlines the requirements for a total flooding clean agent fire suppression system and conventional detection for the clean agent system. The work described in this specification includes all engineering, labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete and test the fire protection system. 1.2 Applicable Standards and Publications: The latest edition of the following standards shall apply: A. NFPA No. 70 - National Electrical Code B. NFPA No. 72 National Fire Alarm Code C. NFPA No. 75 - Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing Equipment D. NFPA No. 2001 Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems E. UL 864, Rev. 9. Standard on Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems F. Requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) 1.3 Inclusive Work in this Specification: A. Provide engineering, installation and testing required for a complete, fire protection system. This includes: 1. An automatically activated, total flooding, clean agent fire suppression system. 2. Fire suppression system control panel including detection, monitoring and alarms. B. The areas to be protected as specified in this section include: Refer to drawings to determine areas to be protected 1. IT Data Center Room 10 1.4 Related Work in Other Sections: The following work may be required and is not included in the scope of work of the fire suppression system contractor. CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONVENTIONAL DETECTION AND CONTROLS

A. Architectural To maintain the clean agent zone integrity and to hold the clean agent concentration for a minimum of 10-minutes, the following is required: The perimeter walls of the room should be full height and sealed to the floor and deck above. 1. In sub floor applications, bulkheads shall be installed to properly isolate the suppression zones. 2. The access doors to all protected areas should have door seals and sweeps as well as automatic door closures. 3. Any penetrations to the exterior walls for cables or conduit should be sealed. 4. Painting or wall patching necessary to comply with finish specification requirements. B. HVAC - Division 15000 All supply or return air ducts, grills or vents that create openings from the clean agent protected zone, shall have motor operated dampers, which close upon the activation of the fire system. The dampers are necessary to help contain the agent within the zone in the event of a discharge. 1. If the area above the ceiling is used as a return air plenum, the walls are required to be built full height to the deck, and motor operated dampers shall be installed. 2. Furnish and install motor operated dampers. C. Wet Pipe and Pre-action Fire Sprinkler Systems Division 15500 1. All work relating to the design and installation of the wet pipe and/or pre-action sprinkler system. D. Electrical Division 16000 1. All power to computer equipment, motorized dampers, HVAC, and any other equipment. 2. Interconnection of the fire suppression system control panel to the building life safety system. 3. Monitoring of the fire suppression system panel by the building management system (if required), building life safety system, and/or security system (if required). 4. All wiring, conduit and/or any other devices (dampers, relays, breakers, etc.) required for shutdown of HVAC and power. This is required for the clean agent fire suppression system. 5. A separate 120 VAC power circuit shall be provided through a dedicated 20-amp circuit breaker to the fire system control panel in a conduit which is separated from all other low voltage wiring. 6. Modifications to the building life-safety system, if applicable, including, but not limited to design, permits, installation materials/ labor, and equipment/devices. 7. Conduit and wire for all above. 13965-2 CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONVENTIONAL DETECTION AND CONTROLS

E. Emergency Power Shut-down Management System (EPSMS) Division 16000 i. All work relating to the design and installation of the Emergency Power Off (EPO) shutdown system. 1.5 Submittals: A. The fire suppression system contractor shall submit the following items to the local fire prevention bureau, owner s insurance underwriter, engineer of record, and all other authorities having jurisdiction, for approval prior to starting work on this project. 1. Fire suppression system installation drawings: a. Field installation layout drawings shall have a scale of not less than 1/8"=1'-0" detailing the location of all clean agent storage tanks, pipe runs, including pipe sizes and lengths, control panel(s), detectors, manual pull stations, abort stations, audible and visual alarms and auxiliary devices, etc. b. Drawings shall show isometric details of agent storage containers, mounting details, and proposed pipe runs and sizes. c. Drawing shall provide an internal control panel-wiring diagram, which shall include power supply requirements and field wiring termination points. d. A complete graphical, sequence of operation shall be submitted detailing all alarm devices, shutdown functions, remote signaling, damper operation, time delay and agent discharge for each zone or system. e. System component data submittal package with material data sheets and CSFM listings. 2. A complete bill of materials. Hydraulic flow calculations for each fire suppression system a. Clean agent hydraulic flow calculations, from a U.L. listed computer program, shall be provided for all engineered clean agent systems. Calculation sheet(s) must include the manufacturers name and U.L. listing for verification. The individual sections of pipe and each fitting to be used, as shown on the isometrics, must be identified and included in the calculation. Total agent discharge time must be shown and detailed by zone. b. Battery stand-by power calculations for the fire suppression system control panel. i. Provide calculations for the battery stand-by power supply taking into consideration the power requirements of all alarms, initiating devices and auxiliary components under full load conditions. ii. Battery power shall be calculated for 24-hour standby and 5-minutes in alarm. B. A copy of all the approved fire suppression system drawings and calculations listed above shall be sent to the architect, engineer, or general contractor for their records. CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONVENTIONAL DETECTION AND CONTROLS

1.6 Quality Assurance: A. Manufacturer: 1. The manufacturer of the integrated clean agent fire protection systems hardware and detection components shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the design and manufacture of similar types of suppression systems. The manufacturer shall be able to refer to similar installations providing satisfactory service. 2. The name of the manufacturer, part numbers and serial numbers shall appear on all major components. 3. All devices, components and equipment shall be the products of the same manufacturer. 4. All devices, components and equipment shall be new and standard products of the manufacturer s latest design, suitable to perform the functions intended. 5. All devices and equipment shall be U.L. listed and/or FM approved. 6. All fire system control panels shall meet the requirements of the current UL Standard 864, Rev 9. 7. Locks for all cabinets shall be keyed alike. B. Fire Suppression System Contractor: 1. The installing contractor shall be a subsidiary company of the manufacturer of the clean agent equipment. This shall be: Facilities Protection Systems 1150 West Central Avenue Brea, CA 92868 Contact: Chris Reimer Tel: (714) 257-2244 Fax (714) 257-2240 2. The installing contractor shall be an experienced firm, with a minimum of (20) years of experience, regularly engaged in the design, installation and testing of integrated clean agent fire suppression systems in strict accordance with NFPA standards. The design and installation of clean agent fire protection systems shall account for more than 50% of the installing contractor s work. 3. The installing fire suppression contractor shall be responsible to design, install, test and maintain the clean agent fire suppression systems, and the detection and controls for the system. 4. The installing contractor shall employ a NICET, Level IV, certified special hazard designer, who will be responsible for this project. 5. Installing contractor shall submit a resume of the engineer, project manager, site foreman and commissioning technician, showing experience in similar projects. Resumes to be submitted with bid. 6. The installing contractor shall show evidence that they carry a minimum $3,000,000.00 liability and completed operations insurance policy. Due to the critical function this system serves these limits 13965-4 CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONVENTIONAL DETECTION AND CONTROLS

shall supersede limits required in the general conditions of the specifications if less stringent. 7. The installing contractor shall have a UL listed clean agent recharging station. The installing contractor shall provide proof of his ability to recharge the largest clean agent system, for this facility, within 24 hours after a discharge. Include the amount of clean agent bulk storage available at the refilling station. 8. The installing contractor shall be an authorized stocking distributor of the clean agent system manufacturer so that immediate replacement parts are available from inventory. 1.7 System Description and Operation A. Clean Agent Fire Suppression System Description: 1. The system shall provide ECARO-25/HFC-125 as the clean agent. 2. The minimum design concentration, for total flooding, shall be 8.0%, by volume, in all areas and/or protected spaces at the minimum anticipated temperature within the protected area. A Class A design concentration of less than 8.0% shall not be accepted and there will be no exceptions. 3. The system shall be complete in all ways. It shall include all mechanical and electrical installation, all detection and control equipment, agent storage containers, clean agent, nozzles, pipe and fittings, manual release and abort stations, audible and visual alarm devices, auxiliary devices and controls, alarm interface, caution/ advisory signs, functional checkout and testing, training and all other operations necessary for a functional, U.L. Listed and/or F.M. approved, clean agent suppression system. 4. The system(s) shall be actuated by photoelectric detectors installed at a maximum spacing of 250 sq. ft. per detector, in both the room and sub-floor protected spaces, if applicable. If the airflow exceeds one air change per minute, photoelectric detectors shall be installed at a spacing not to exceed 125 square feet per detector. (Ref. NFPA No. 72 -current edition) 5. Detectors shall be wired in Fike s sequential detection method of operation, using Class "B" wiring arrangement. No other detection/wiring arrangement will be acceptable. B. Sequence of Operation of the Clean Agent Systems: CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONVENTIONAL DETECTION AND CONTROLS

1. Actuation of one (1) spot type detector within the zone, shall: Part 2. Products a. Light a status LED at the clean agent control panel indicating Alarm. b. Activate a pre-alarm horn/strobe - pulsing mode c. Activate system common alarm relay. d. Signal the building life-safety system to active building notification devices. 2. Actuation of any two detectors within the zone, shall: a. Light a status LED at the clean agent control panel indicating Pre-Discharge. b. Activate pre-discharge horn/strobe - continuous mode c. Start 30-second time-delay sequence. d. System abort sequence is enabled at this time. e. Shut down the HVAC system including internal dedicated air units, and/or close dampers. 3. After completion of the time-delay sequence, the clean agent system shall discharge and the following shall occur: a. Light a status LED at the clean agent control panel indicating Release. b. Activate a visual strobe device outside the zone in which the discharge occurred. c. Shut off power to the equipment 4. Manual release of the clean agent system a. The system shall be capable of being actuated by manual discharge devices located at each zone exit. b. Manual actuation shall bypass the time delay and abort functions, shall cause the system to discharge and shall cause all alarm and shutdown devices to operate in the same manner as if the system had operated automatically. 5. Abort switch activated a. Light a status LED at the clean agent control panel indicating Abort, The abort switch shall provide a temporary means of aborting the clean agent discharge. The switch, when depressed, shall interrupt the signal from the clean agent control panel to the agent release module. As long as the button is depressed, the clean agent will not discharge. If released before the system is reset, the clean agent will discharge. 2.1 All materials and equipment shall be standard products of the manufacturer s latest design, and shall be suitable to perform the functions intended. When one or more pieces of equipment are used for the same function, they shall be the same model number and be from the same manufacturer. 13965-6 CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONVENTIONAL DETECTION AND CONTROLS

2.2 All devices shall be UL listed and/or FM approved. 2.3 All references to model numbers and other pertinent information herein are intended to establish standards of performance, quality and construction. These model numbers are based on equipment manufactured by Fike Corporation, 704 South 10th Street, Blue Springs, MO 64015. Equivalent products may be considered if adequate information is submitted to the specifying engineer three (3) weeks prior to bid date. 2.4 Clean Agent A. The clean agent shall be ECARO-25 (HFC-125) B. It is critical that our clients use proven a technology, therefore, new water-based or fluid-based technologies will not be accepted unless they meet the following criteria: 1. The clean agent has been listed on the EPA snap list as an acceptable halon alternative for use in occupied spaces for a minimum of five years. 2. The clean agent shall not reduce oxygen as the main method of extinguishment, as this creates a hypoxic atmosphere. 3. Clean agent shall not form pentafluoropropionic acid (PFPA), or any other chemical, when exposed to ultraviolet light and/or contact to moisture. PFPA is a strong acid that is corrosive to a variety of metals including mild steel. They may also result in damage to mucous membranes and the upper respiratory tract. 4. The clean agent has extinguished a fire in a live data center or communication signal processing center more than two years ago without any reported equipment failures or damage to equipment, or reported injuries due to PFPA s, liver damage or oxygen deprivation, caused by the extinguishing agent. 5. The clean agent shall have a vapor pressure similar to Halon 1301 (190 220 psia @ 77 o F), so that it flashes to a gas at room temperature and shall not rely upon friction to vaporize. 6. The clean agent, relative toxicity level for the lethal concentration to rats, or LC50, shall not be less than seven (7) times the extinguishing concentration of the agent. For reference: a. Halon = 12+ times b. FM-200/FE-227 = 11.25 times c. FE-25/ECARO-25 = 8.8 times d. For alternatives please submit this safety factor with your request to use an alternative agent. CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONVENTIONAL DETECTION AND CONTROLS

2.5 Clean Agent Nozzles: A. The nozzles shall be UL listed to protect a ceiling height of up to 16 feet. B. The nozzles shall be Fike s P/N 84-000 series. C. Nozzles shall be available in NPT pipe sizes 1/4" thru 2". Each size shall be available in 180 and 360- degree distribution patterns. D. Deflector plates shall be used with the Fike s Series 84 nozzles when sensitive ceiling tiles must be protected. E. A maximum nozzle flow rate of 17 lbs/sec shall be designed for all areas with false ceilings or delicate operations. Higher flow rates may dislodge objects, which could damage or affect a equipment and/or processes. 2.6 Clean Agent Storage Cylinders A. The clean agent shall be Fike s P/N 70-200 series agent storage cylinders. B. Cylinders shall be super-pressurized, with dry nitrogen, to an operating pressure of 360 psig at 70 o F. C. The clean agent shall be stored in FIKE P/N 70-XXX Series Agent Storage Containers. Containers shall be super-pressurized, with dry Nitrogen, to an operating pressure of 360 psi @ 70 F (25 bar @ 21 C). Containers shall be of high-strength alloy steel construction and conform to NFPA 2001 D. Containers shall be actuated by the following methods: 1. Single container applications (Electric) By an Impulse Valve Operator (IVO) wired through a Fike P/N 10-2748 Impulse Releasing Module (IRM). This method allows mechanical release. 2. Multiple container applications (Electric / Pneumatic) The 1 st container is operated by an Impulse Valve Operator (IVO) wired through a Fike P/N 10-2748 Impulse Releasing Module (IRM). 6 additional containers equipped with Impulse Valve Pneumatic Operator(s) (IVPO) can be operated by the pressure from the 1 st container. This method allows mechanical release. 3. Multiple container applications (Electric) By Impulse Valve Operators (IVO) wired through a Fike P/N 10-2748 Impulse Releasing Modules (IRM), located at each agent storage container. (maximum 6 container system). This method does not allow mechanical release. Each cylinder shall have a pressure gauge. The pressure gauge shall be color coded to provide an easy visual indication of container pressure 4. Each cylinder shall have a low-pressure switch Fike s P/N 70-1121, to provide visual and electrical supervision of the container pressure. The low-pressure switch shall be wired to the control panel to provide an audible and visual "Trouble" alarm in the event the container pressure drops below 272 psi. 5. Each cylinder shall have a pressure relief provision that automatically operates when the internal temperature exceeds 150OF. 6. Each cylinder shall be fitted with a Fike P/N 70-1353 liquid level device to determine the clean agent quantity without removing the cylinder from its mounting bracket, disconnecting the distribution piping, or removing the clean agent system from service. (35 lb. and 60 lb. cylinders are excluded) 13965-8 CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONVENTIONAL DETECTION AND CONTROLS

2.7 Fire Suppression System Control Panel: A. Control panels shall be listed and approved by U.L 864, rev. 9, no exceptions. Control panels which are not U.L. 864 rev. 9 approved will become obsolete, possibly causing hardship to the client when components need to be replaced in the near future. B. The control panel shall be a SHP Pro Conventional Releasing Panel PN 10-063 manufactured by Fike Corporation, Blue Springs, MO. C. The control panel and its components shall be U.L. listed and FM approved for use as a local fire alarm system, and/or releasing of clean agent, deluge and pre-action fire suppression systems. D. The control panel shall be microprocessor based with hardware and software integration designed to guarantee reliability. E. The control panel shall be capable of providing 7AH to 40 AH battery standby power supplies. F. Control Panel Capacity and General Operation The SHP Pro Control Panel shall provide the following capabilities and functions: 1. Three (3) Class B (Style Y) notification appliance circuits rated for 2.0 amps @ 24 VDC. 2. Up to two (2) Style B initiating device circuits capable of sequential alarm, cross-zone, or single detector release operation with an overall system capacity of 50 detectors maximum. 3. Three (3) Style B initiating device circuits capable of monitoring closed contact devices. 4. Optional Class A module that converts all five initiating device circuits to Style D wiring and operation. 5. Optional Class A module that converts all five output circuits to Style Z (3 NAC, 2 Releasing) 6. Eight (10) Status LEDs plus alpha-numeric display for troubleshooting: AC normal; alarm; predischarge; release; supervisory; trouble; panel silenced; abort; release disabled; and ground fault. 7. Programmable pre-discharge and discharge timers 8. Resettable and continuous auxiliary output power 9. Five (5) optional Abort types 10. Intelligent Transistor protection to prevent noise spikes and microprocessor failure from inadvertently activating release outputs 11. A dedicated Disarm switch for release outputs 12. Dedicated alarm and trouble contacts programmable for alarm, trouble, pre-discharge, discharge, abort, supervisory or water flow functions, depending on panel configuration. 13. Two (3) Form C relays, rated at 2 amps, are provided on the SHP PRO panel board. Installation of up to two (2) optional CRM4 Relay Module (P/N 10-2204) will provide up to eight (8) additional 2 amp relays. CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONVENTIONAL DETECTION AND CONTROLS

14. Multiple input power source - 120 VAC or 240 VAC 15. 4.0 amp @ 24 VDC power supply to operate high current draw horns and strobes. 16. Available in either Red or Gray finish. 13965-10 CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONVENTIONAL DETECTION AND CONTROLS

2.8 Detectors: A. All detectors shall be supported by 4 base 67-1036, or 6 base 67-1029. B. The Photoelectric sensors shall be Fike s 63-1014 series 2.9 Abort Switch and Manual Release: A. The Manual Release device shall be a Fike P/N 10-1038 and the Abort Switch shall be Fike P/N 10-1039.. B. This shall be a unit with an integrated, stainless steel face plate measuring 7-3/8 wide and 3-3/4 high. C. The system abort switch is combined with the manual release station. D. The system abort provides temporary manual means by which the activation circuit may be interrupted before automatic actuation occurs. E. The manual release switch shall have a metal housing with a dual action release configuration to prevent accidental system discharge. F. The legend on the front of the manual release shall read "Agent-Release". G. Each manual release and abort station shall include a monitor module to provide for a custom message and device location at the control panel. H. Each abort button shall be permanently labeled "Abort" 2.10 Audible and Visual Alarms: A. Alarm signal devices shall operate from the fire system control panel. B. The Alarm Horn/Strobe shall be a FIKE P/N P4R-P. C. The tone of the horn shall be slow pulse for 1 st alarm and pulsing mode for 2 nd alarm and continuous for discharge mode. D. The discharge strobe unit shall be a Fike P/N SR-P. 2.11 Caution/Advisory Signs: A. Provide signs as required to comply with NFPA 2001 and the recommendations of the clean agent equipment manufacturer. B. Entrance Caution sign: (1) required at entrance to each protected zone. C. Manual Discharge sign: (1) required at each manual discharge station. D. Flashing Light sign: (1) required at each discharge strobe at each exit from a protected zone. 2.12 Auxiliary Panels: CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONVENTIONAL DETECTION AND CONTROLS

A. Maintenance By-Pass Switch/Panel Shall be located adjacent to the clean agent SHP Pro control panel. The maintenance by-pass switch/panel shall have a key-switch which, when operated, will place the clean agent control panel in a "TEST" mode without affecting the detection system. B. Graphic Map 1. The graphic map shall be a full color image on a white background mounted on rigid backing and laminated. Provide a concealed secured hanging system. The graphic map shall include, but not limited to: Part 3. Execution a. Building outline, including address, and adjacent streets. b. Map shall be to scale. c. All exterior door and doors exiting the protected room. d. Fire suppression control panel e. Pre-action sprinkler riser f. Compass direction, and the map shall be oriented to the room when mounted. You Are Here shall be indicated g. Zone area separations and designations. h. Legend of devices and other symbols. i. Addresses at each addressable device 3.1 Clean Agent System A. Each zone shall have its own supply of clean agent. B. All clean agent cylinder bracing shall meet seismic zone 4 requirements. C. Each clean agent supply shall be modular in design, and located within the hazard area, or as near as possible, to reduce the amount of pipe and fittings required to install the system. D. Distribution piping, and fittings, shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and NFPA 2001. It shall be installed by qualified individuals using accepted practices and quality workmanship procedures E. All piping shall be adequately supported and anchored per the requirements of NFPA 2001, and at all directional changes and nozzle locations. F. All piping shall be reamed, blown clear and swabbed with suitable solvents to remove burrs, mill varnish and cutting oils before assembly. G. All male pipe threads shall be sealed with teflon tape pipe sealant, applied in accordance the manufacturer's requirements. 13965-12 CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONVENTIONAL DETECTION AND CONTROLS

3.2 Fire Suppression System Contractor: A. Obtain system approvals from local authorities and pay for all permits and fees. B. Review all project drawings to become familiar with the items that affect the clean agent system and consider them in its design. C. Provide coordination for all interfacing trades to ensure that the clean agent system will operate as engineered. 3.3 System & Control Wiring: A. All fire suppression system wiring, in this section, shall be furnished and installed by the fire suppression system contractor. B. All wiring shall be installed in electrical metallic tubing (EMT) or conduit. C. All system components shall be securely supported independent of the wiring. Runs of conduit and wiring shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly supported, installed parallel and perpendicular to walls and partitions. D. The sizes of the conductors shall be those specified by the manufacturer. Color codes shall be used see drawings. E. All wires shall be tagged at all junction points and shall be free from grounds and crosses between conductors. F. Final connections between equipment and the system wiring shall be made under the direct supervision of a factory-trained representative. G. All wiring shall be installed by qualified individuals, in a neat and workman like manner, to conform to the National Electrical Code, Article 725, for Class 1 Signal Systems, except as otherwise permitted for limited energy circuits, as described in NFPA 72. Wiring installation shall meet all State and local codes. H. The complete system electrical installation, and all auxiliary components, shall be grounded in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 3.4 Testing Fire suppression system contractor shall coordinate field test with other trades to verify proper field operation. A. System Functional Testing Preliminary Tests 1. After the system installation has been completed, the entire system shall be checked out, inspected and functionally tested by qualified, trained personnel, in accordance with the manufacturer s recommended procedures and NFPA standards. This test shall be conducted prior to the acceptance test with the approving authorities. This shall include: 2. Piping distribution, size and nozzle type, size, and cylinder location, type, size and fill shall match the drawings and clean agent flow calculations. 3. Check that all pipe, nozzles and tanks are securely fastened. CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONVENTIONAL DETECTION AND CONTROLS

4. All containers and distribution piping shall be checked for proper mounting and installation. 5. The clean agent pipe shall be pneumatically tested in a closed circuit, at a 40 psig. At the end of ten minutes, the pressure drop shall not exceed 20% of test pressure. 6. A puff test using nitrogen, or other inert gas shall be performed on the entire piping network to verify that flow is continuous and that piping nozzles are unobstructed. 7. All electrical wiring shall be tested for proper connection, continuity and resistance to ground. 8. The complete system shall be functionally tested and all functions, including system and equipment interlocks, must be operational at least five (5) days prior to the final acceptance tests. 9. Each detector shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures, and test values recorded. 10. All system and equipment interlocks, such as door release devices, audible and visual devices, equipment shutdowns, local and remote alarms, etc. shall be tested to function as required and designed. 11. Each control panel circuit shall be tested for trouble by inducing a trouble condition into the system. B. Acceptance Tests: 1. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA guidelines. 2. This test shall be performed with the approving authority present. 3. Entire control system functional test. This includes testing each and every device in the system to prove that it works properly. This includes all detectors, manual release stations, alarms, aborts, and maintenance switches, etc. 4. All circuits shall be tested. 5. Room Pressurization Test: a. A room pressurization test shall be conducted (one preliminary and one final test), in each protected space, to determine that the room will contain and maintain the clean agent system concentration levels for the required ten (10) minutes. b. The test(s) shall be conducted using the RetroTec door fan system, or equivalent, with integrated computer program. c. If room pressurization testing indicates that openings exist which would result in leakage and/or loss of the clean extinguishing agent, the installing contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the proper sealing of the protected space(s) by the general contractor or his sub-contractor or agent. The general contractor shall be responsible for adequately sealing all protected space(s) against agent loss or leakage. The installing contractor shall inspect all work to ascertain that the protected space(s) have been adequately and properly sealed. If the first room pressurization test is not successful, in accordance with these specifications, the installing contractor shall direct the general contractor to determine, and correct, the cause of the test failure. Subsequent tests, if required, will be performed and the additional costs shall be authorized as a change order. Copies of successful test results shall be submitted to the owner for record. 13965-14 CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONVENTIONAL DETECTION AND CONTROLS

d. Upon acceptance by the owner, the completed clean agent system(s) shall be placed in normal service. Until that time, a tag indicating that the system is not in operation shall be placed on each clean agent cylinder and the fire system control panel. 3.5 Training Requirements: A. After final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide operational training to each shift of the owner s personnel. Each training session shall include system control panel operation, manual and abort functions, trouble procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency procedures. 3.6 Close Out Documents A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1. Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide complete operation and maintenance instruction manuals. 2. All aspects of the system operation and maintenance shall be detailed, including piping isometrics, wiring diagrams of all circuits, a written description of the system design and sequence of operation, drawing(s) illustrating control logic and equipment used in the system. Checklists and procedures for emergency situations, troubleshooting techniques and maintenance operations and procedures shall be included in the manual. 3. Data sheets on each component included on the system. The part numbers and options included shall be indicated on the data sheets, on a separate chart, or reference to the drawings. 4. Provide four (4) copies to the owner. B. As-Built Drawings 3.7 Warranty: 1. Upon completion of each system, the installing contractor shall provide four (4) copies of system "As-Built" drawings to the owner. The drawings shall show actual installation details including all equipment locations (i.e.: control panel(s), agent container(s), detectors, alarms, manuals and aborts, etc.) as well as piping and conduit routing details. 2. Four (4) copies for each system, to the owner. A. All system components furnished under this contract shall be guaranteed against defect in design, material and workmanship for the full warranty time which is standard with the manufacturer and/or supplier, but in no case less than one year from the date of system acceptance. B. If the customer is under maintenance contract with the installing contractor, the warranty period will be extended to a period of sixty (60) months after installation and original start-up of the system. Batteries and initiators are limited to a one (1) year warranty. END OF SECTION CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONVENTIONAL DETECTION AND CONTROLS

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 15300 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS A. Design, furnish and install wet pipe fire sprinkler system for protection of building. B. Design, furnish and install Class II standpipe system for Stage. C. Furnish all labor, materials, services, testing, transportation and equipment necessary for and reasonably incidental to the proper and satisfactory installation of the automatic fire protection systems as specified herein. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the automatic fire protection system inside the building and within 5 feet of the building itself. See Civil Engineer s plans for on-site fire main design. This specification is intended to establish the required performance and quality of the work necessary to provide for a complete automatic fire protection system to serve the building on site as indicated on the drawings. E. Work or equipment not indicated or specified which is necessary for the complete and proper operation of the work of the Section in accordance with the true intent and meaning of the contract documents shall be provided by this contractor and incorporated under this Section of the work at no additional cost. 1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Wet pipe fire sprinkler system shall conform to NFPA13, 2007 edition. 1. Contractor shall prepare fully coordinated shop drawings for approval prior to installation. Piping system shown on plans is for reference only and general design intent. Contractor shall not make substantial changes and must determine final number of fittings and routing to meet system and building demands. 2. Pipe sizes used in shop drawings shall not be less than those shown on drawings. 3. No AutoCAD backgrounds of the fire sprinkler system piping network will be made available. B. Manufacture s Data 1. Submit complete and detailed equipment and material list of items to be furnished and installed under this Section 2. Submit manufacturer s specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. C. Drawings 1. Drawings shall be made in AutoCAD 2007 version as the latest. Drawings shall be same size as contract drawings. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Code Requirements: All work covered by this Section shall conform to the 2007 edition of NFPA 13 and 14., California State Fire Marshall, DSA, Uniform Fire Code with California amendments. B. UL and FM Compliance: All material and components shall be UL listed and labeled and/or Factory Mutual Approved for the application anticipated. AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 15300-1 15300 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 121112

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 C. Permits and Inspections: Contractor must obtain and pay all fees for permits, licenses, inspections, etc. which are required and shall deliver all certificates to Owner. D. Installing contractor shall have a current C-16 license and have had prior experience in similar scope of this project within last 2 years. 1.3 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. All work covered in this Section shall conform to the regulatory requirements of California State Fire Marshall, DSA, Uniform Fire Code with California amendments. If there are conflicts the more strict standard shall apply. 1.5 1.4 SCHEDULING A. Contractor shall coordinate installation of system with all other trades. B. Examination of Premises 1. Contractor shall make a careful examination of the premises and shall thoroughly familiarize themselves with the requirements of the contract. By submitting a proposal for the work under this section of the specification, the Contractor shall be deemed to have made such a study and the he is familiar with and accepts all conditions of the site. C. Coordination PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. Clearance an Openings: Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate his work with all other trades to avoid confliction and permit for a neat and orderly appearance of the entire installation. The contractor shall, in advance of the work, furnish instructions to the General Contractor as to his requirements for equipment and material installation of any kind, whether or not specifically mentioned on drawing or in specifications, and shall included recesses, chases in walls, and all required openings in the structure. Should furnishing this information be neglected, delayed or incorrect and additional cuttings are found to be required, this cost shall be charge to this Contractor. 2. Piping runs found to be in conflict with the work of other trades, as a result of neglected coordination, shall be removed and reinstalled in new locations designated by the architect at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. To achieve coordination, contractor shall contact Architect and obtain necessary information to design his system into the allotted spaces without interfering with work by other trades. 1.1 2.1 REQUIRMENTS A. Submittal Data 1. Furnish and install at one time, in accordance with General Conditions, six bound copies of valid submittal data on all material, equipment and devices. The Contractor shall make all presentations and clarifications although he may bring suppliers and representatives for technical assistance to meetings called by architect. Each submitted item shall be indexed and referenced to these specifications and to put identification numbers on fixture and equipment submittals. 2. Submittals are required on all items to insure the latest and most complete manufacturer s data is available for review. Manufacturer s submittal literature and shop drawings often contain information not available in design literature; requirements of the submittals and engineer s submittal notes are part of the work of this Section except that engineer s notes may be used as a means of increasing the scope of work of this Section. AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 15300-2 15300 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 121112

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 3. Submittals will be checked for general conformance with the design concept of the project, but the review does not guarantee quantities shown and does not supersede requirements of the Division to properly install work. B. Wet Pipe System 1. Black Steel, 1-2, Schedule 40, ASTM A135 or ASTM A795 for all piping with threaded joints and fittings. Pipe must be UL Listed or FM approved 2. Black Steel 2 ½ -6, Schedule 10, ASTM A135 or ASTM A795 for all piping with grooved joints and fittings. 3. Threaded fitting shall be cast iron, class 125, conforming to ANSI B16.3 and ANSI B16.4. 4. Flanged fittings shall be cast iron, class 125, conforming to ANSI B16.9. 5. Welded fitting shall be forged steel welding outlet fitting conforming to ANSI B1.20.1 6. One-piece reducing fittings shall be used wherever a change is made in pipe size. Bushings and reducing couplings shall not be permitted. C. Standpipe System 1. Black Steel, 1-2, Schedule 40, ASTM A135 or ASTM A795 for all piping with threaded joints and fittings. Pipe must be UL Listed or FM approved 2. Black Steel 2 ½ -6, Schedule 10, ASTM A135 or ASTM A795 for all piping with grooved joints and fittings. 3. Threaded fitting shall be cast iron, class 125, conforming to ANSI B16.3 and ANSI B16.4. 4. Flanged fittings shall be cast iron, class 125, conforming to ANSI B16.9. 5. Welded fitting shall be forged steel welding outlet fitting conforming to ANSI B1.20.1 6. One-piece reducing fittings shall be used wherever a change is made in pipe size. Bushings and reducing couplings shall not be permitted. 7. Recessed Fire Hose Cabinet provide where indicated on drawings: duo-vertical panel with lock and Break Rite handle, paint to match colors when in view of audience Potter Roemer Series 1000 or equal 8. Surface Mounted Fire Hose Cabinet provide where indicated on drawing: duo-vertical panel with lock, tempered safety glass and Break Rite Handle, paint to match colors when in view of audience Potter Roemer Series 1000 or equal. 9. Hose Rack Assembly 1 ½ hose rack assembly with 50 of lined 500 lb. Polyflex hose with satin brass fog nozzle Potter Roemer 2500 Series Model 2505-A or equal D. Sprinkler Heads 1. Provide sprinklers of types and sizes as indicated on drawings 2. Provide upright sprinklers in areas with exposed piping. 3. Sprinklers shall be glass bulb type. 4. Sprinklers in concealed spaces, exterior locations and any other areas which may experience over 100 degrees F ambient temperatures shall be furnished with 200 to 225 degree rated AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 15300-3 15300 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 121112

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 sprinklers. Sprinkler heads in boiler rooms shall be furnished with sprinklers rated at 250 to 290 degrees F. 5. Sprinklers may be 401 canopy type with head guard installed in ceiling with surface mounted lighting. 6. Sprinkler heads in light hazard occupancy shall be quick response type. Sprinklers shall be same manufacturer throughout. Extended coverage heads will not be permitted. 7. Sprinklers shall be installed in center of tile at 12 increments from tile edge and shall be aligned with other ceiling mounted devices. 8. Sprinkler head guards shall be installed where any sprinkler is subject to damage and at elevations of 7-6 or lower in exposed locations. Sprinkler head guards shall utilize a bolt-on feature to the base of the sprinkler or be a factory installed guard. 9. Sprinklers installed underneath catwalks, floors or other intermediate areas shall have intermediate heat shield attached. 10. Flow indicator shall have retard feature and set between 45 and 90 seconds. Connection of this work shall be under Division 16. All shut-off valves including PIV and backflow preventor shall be electronically supervised. 11. Pipe through ceilings at head locations shall be furnished with a two-piece or fully concealed escutcheon. Escutcheons shall be identical and match the other escutcheon of the same type throughout the building. Exposed pipe through walls and =ceilings shall have split ring chrome escutcheon. 12. Furnish and install all required signs, spare heads, special wrenches and spare sprinkler heads and boxes as required by NFPA13, 14 and this specification. 13. Sprinkler system piping shall be provided with complete drainage as required by NFPA 13. All drain valves shall be plugged and piped to accessible location. Those installed within walls shall be equipped with locking access panels. 14. Provide seismic separation assemblies as indicated. Assembly shall be UL/FM swing joint assembly rated at a minimum of 175 psi. 15. System main drain shall be piped to nearest floor sink in riser room or area. 16. Hanging, bracing and support shall utilize only UL/FM approved products and comply with NFPA 13. Hanging, bracing and supports shall be by one manufacturer and listed as an approved assembly. 17. Fire sprinkler riser shall be equipped with butterfly valve, check vale, water flow switch and gauge. E. Fire Department Connection F. PIV 1. Provide FDC at backflow preventor where FDC will be accessible to the fire department from the street or sidewalk. Install FDC per NFPA 13 and local requirements. 1. PIV shall be electrically supervised and set at a height of 3-0 to the top and have the handle locked into the open position with a break-away lock. G. Backflow Preventor AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 15300-4 15300 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 121112

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 2.2 MATERIALS 1. Provide as indicated on Civil drawings. Approved Manufacturers Ames, Febco, Watts and Wilkins. Provide detector check assembly as required. Submit friction loss data with hydraulic calculations. A. Access Panels 1. Square, stainless steel, with vandal proof door lock operated by allen wrench: Manufacturer s: Smith 4760, Elmdor DW-AKL B. B. Globe or Angle Valves: UL/FM 1. Bronze 2 inches and smaller, screwed in bonnet, threaded ends, riding stem: Manufacturers: Nibco-T301, Kennedy-98 SD United-126T C. Automatic C. Automatic Sprinkler Sprinkler Head Head 1. Brass pendant: temperature, size, and k-factor as indicated on drawings. Manufacturers: Reliable F1FR56, Viking-VK302, Tyco-TY3231, Victualic-V27 2. Brass uprights temperature, size and k-factor as indicated on drawings: Manufacturers: Reliable F1FR300, Viking VK300, Tyco-TY3131, Victualic-V-27. 3. Chrome or poly coated semi-recessed type with semi-recessed escutcheon: temperature, size and k-factor as indicated on drawings. Manufacturers: Relieable-F1FR56, Viking- VK302, Tyco-TY3531, Victaulic-V27. 4. Fully concealed, white or chrome cover: temperature, size and k-factor as indicated in drawings. Manufacturers: Reliable F4FR or G4A, Viking-VK462, Tyco-TY3531, Victaulic V38. D. Gear D. Operated Gear Operated Butterfly Butterfly Valves: Valves: Grooved Grooved end, gear end, operated gear operated Butterfly Butterfly Valve, 300 Valve, psi 300 for fire psi for fire protection protection and sprinkler and sprinkler risers. UL/FM risers. Listed UL/FM and Listed Approved, and Approved, with weatherproof with weatherproof gearbox gearbox and DPDT and DPDT monitor monitor switch, double switch, seal double design seal for design bubble for tight bubble shut tight off shut at 175 off psi. at 175 Corrosion psi. Corrosion resistant, resistant, fusion bonded fusion bonded nylon II nylon body coating, II body coating, easy to easy read to position read position indicator: indicator: Manufacturers: Manufacturers: Victualic705W, Victualic705W, Tyco-580, Tyco-580, Nibco- Nibco- GD-4765-8N,.Kennedy-82M E. Check E. Valves: Check Valves: 1. 2 and smaller bronze, 200 psi WOG, bronze disc, swing type, bolted cap, threaded ends: Manufacturers: Crane-37, Nibco-T-433-Y, Stockham-B-319, United-62T 2. 2 ½ and Larger: Iron check valve, class 175, composition disc, swing type, bolted cap, UL Listed, FM Approved flanged ends: Manufacturers: Kennedy-126, Tyco-Model G, Clow-F5380, Stockham-G-940. 3. 2 ½ and larger: Grooved check valve: Manufacturers: Victaulic Series 717, Tyco-590F, Gruvlock-7800, United-67. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this section shal be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 15300-5 15300 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 121112

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 3.2 1.2 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove all burrs. Bevel or groove all plain end ferrous pipe ends. B. Protection 1. All work, equipment and materials shall be protected at all time. Contractor shall repair all damage caused either indirectly or directly by his own workers. Contractor shall also protect his own work from damage. He shall sloe all pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. He shall protect all his equipment and materials against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical injury. 2. Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage to equipment and material until he has received written notice from the Architect or Engineer that work has been accepted C. Uninspected work 1. The contractor shall not allow or cause any of his work to be covered up or closed until it has been inspected, tested and approved by all authorities having jurisdiction and until Project Record drawings have been properly annotated. 2. Should any of his work be covered up or closed in before such inspection, he shall, at his own expense, uncover the work to the satisfaction of the inspection party. All related work cost shall be borne by the contractor. D. Record Drawings 1. Contractor shall provide and keep up-to-date a complete as-built record set of blackline drawings which shall show every change from the original drawings and the exact as-built locations and size of the work provided under this section. This set shall include locations, dimensions, depth of bur On completion of the work this set of prints shall be delivered to the Architect and updated on CAD drawings. E. Final Approval 1. Prior to final acceptance of the installation, the contractor shall furnish to the Architect certificates of approval signed by the State Fire Marshall having jurisdiction, stating that the systems, as installed, have been inspected and tested and meet all governing code requirements. F. Guarantees 3.3 1.3 CLEANING 1. Contractor shall guarantee the automatic fire sprinkler system unconditionally for a period of one (1) year after final acceptance. If during this period, any material, equipment or any part of the system fail to function properly, Contractor shall make good the defects and without any expense to the Owner. A. Remove scale and foreign matter from inside and outside of pipes before assembly. 3.4 1.4 INSTALLATION A. Install underground piping connected to detector check or water main indicated. Braced or clamped bends shall be in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 24. Provide vertical clamp rods at flange and spigot piece of riser, long enough to pass through riser s base flange where required. Furnish concrete thrust blocks where required. Tracer wire shall be according to other provision of this project s specification. AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 15300-6 15300 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 121112

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 B. Install FDC s, check valves, control valves, gauges inspectors test and drain assemblies and flow indicator per DSA approved drawings. FDC must be unobstructed and accessible for the fire departments first response unit. C. Pipe through floors, wall and ceiling, at head locations, shall be furnished with required sleeves, escutcheons and fire caulking where indicated or required by code. Escutcheons shall be polished chrome plated unless other finish is selected by Architect. D. Sprinkler system shall be provided with complete drainage facilities in accordance with CBC standards. Drain discharge shall be into sanitary sewer and such drainage receptacles shall be designed to accept the full flow of water at drain test conditions under full working pressure. E. Upon completion of work and before substantial completion, subject entire system, including underground piping, to tests as required by NFPA13, 14 and CBC standards and furnish Owner with a certificate of compliance as required. F. Close nipples and threaded unions are prohibited. Where a threaded union or coupling is need, a groove type fitting shall be used. G. Mechanical tee bolted branch outlet fittings and plain-end locking fittings are prohibited. H. Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer s latest published installation instructions. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. Gaskets shall be of elastomer grade suitable for the intended service, and shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer. I. Sprinkler lines within the building shall be concealed within the structure. Risers shall be installed as indicated in drawings. J. Sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, have cracked bulbs, or show a visible loss of fluid shall not be installed. K. Sprinkler bulb protectors shall be removed by hand after installation. L. Routing of pipe in exposed areas shall be subject to the Architects approval in the final shop drawings. M. Underground piping shall have a 36 minimum bury. Pipe shall be installed on a flat undisturbed sand bed. After required pressure leak test, pipe shall be covered with sand not less than 6 inches thick before backfilling. Comply with all NFPA Standards. N. Provide approved backflow prevention assemblies as required. Installations of backflow prevention assemblies shall be tested and certified by a certified backflow technician prior to Substantial Completion. Test reports shall be submitted to the IOR for mailing to the proper agency. O. Provide shunt trip when sprinklers are installed in elevator machine rooms and elevator hoistway unless the sprinklers are located 2 feet or less from hoist way pit floor. P. Each floor shall have a separate control valve and flow switch and shall be securely enclosed or secured with chain and break-away lock. 3.5 1.5 CLEANING A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste material and legally dispose at off-project site. END OF SECTION AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 15300-7 15300 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 121112

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED SECTION 15400 PLUMBING A. Furnish all labor, materials, services, testing, transportation and equipment necessary for the completion of all plumbing work as indicated on drawings and specified herein. Work materials and equipment not indicated or specified which is necessary for the complete and proper operation of the work of this Section in accordance with the true intent and meaning of the contract documents shall be provided and incorporated at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code Requirements: All work covered by this Section shall conform to the latest requirements of the following regulations: 1. C.C.R., Title 24, Part 5 (2001 CPC). 2. 2001 California Plumbing Code. 3. SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems. 4. National Fire Protection Association. 5. California Division of the State Architect. 6. California State Division of Industrial Safety. 7. County Health Department. 8. Any other legally constituted body-having jurisdiction thereof. B. Nothing in the specifications or drawings shall be construed to permit deviation from the requirements of governing codes unless approval for said deviation has been obtained from the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction and from the Owner's representative. 1.3 DRAWINGS A. Because of the small-scale drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the conditions surrounding installation of his work, furnishing the necessary piping, fittings, valves, traps, and other devices which may be required to complete the installation. B. The general arrangement indicated on the drawings shall be followed as closely as possible. Coordinate with the Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings and the work of other trades prior to installation of piping fixtures and equipment to verify adequate space available for installation of the work shown. In the event a field condition arises which makes it impossible to install the work as indicated, submit, in writing, the proposed departures to the Architect for his approval. Only when Architect's approval is given, in writing, shall Contractor proceed with installation of the work. PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 C. Special Note: Should the Contractor make changes in the installation differing from what is indicated on the contract drawings and not necessitated due to field conditions as indicated hereinabove, the Contractor shall be required to re-install the work to comply with what has been indicated on the contract drawings. Should it be impossible to reinstall the work and the installation is in accordance with all governing authorities, the architect may permit the installation to remain. However, all costs incurred to revise the contract drawings by the engineer for resubmittal to the building department indicating the as-installed condition shall become the responsibility of the Contractor. D. In case of a difference in the specifications or between the specifications and the drawings, the Contractor shall figure the most expensive alternate and after award of contract, shall secure direction from the Architect. 1.4 PERMITS, INSPECTIONS AND LICENSES A. All permits, inspections and licenses required by the legally constituted authorities for installation of the work according to the plans and specifications shall be obtained and paid as a part of the work of this section. 1.5 UTILITIES A. See Drawings for Points of Connection. B. Certain site utilities are to be connected to and extended. Before laying of any pipe or digging of any trenches, Contractor shall determine by actual excavation and measurement exact location and depth of lines to which he is to connect. In event depth of lines is not sufficient to permit connection in manner indicated, Contractor shall obtain direction from the Owner's representative before proceeding with this work. C. Verify that utility companies size their services and meters to suit ultimate demand indicated on the drawings. D. Gas Service and Meter Assembly: The Contractor shall arrange with the serving utility company for the installation of new gas service with complete meter assembly of the capacity indicated and in the location as shown on the drawings. All items served with gas shall be operated at full fire and adjusted by the Contractor. In cooperation with gas utility, make all required adjustments to main gas pressure regulators. The Owner shall pay for all required fees. 1.6 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES A. Before bidding on this work, Contractors shall make a careful examination of the premises and shall thoroughly familiarize themselves with the requirements of the contract. By the act of submitting a proposal for the work included in this contract, the Contractor shall be deemed to have made such study and examination, and that he is familiar with and accepts all conditions of the site. 1.7 PROTECTION A. All work, equipment and materials shall be protected at all times. Contractor shall make good all damage caused either directly or indirectly by his own workmen. Contractor shall also protect his own work from damage. He shall close all pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. He shall protect all his equipment and materials against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical injury. Upon completion, all work shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered in a new condition. 15400-2 PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 B. Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage to equipment and materials until he has received written notice from the Architect or Engineer that his work has been accepted. 1.8 LOCATIONS A. The locations of apparatus, piping and equipment indicated on the drawings are approximate. Piping and equipment shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid all obstruction, preserve headroom, and keep openings and passages clear. The locations of and mounting heights of all fixtures shall be coordinated with the architectural plans and room elevations. B. Clearances and Openings: Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate his work with all other trades to avoid conflict and permit for a neat and orderly appearance of the entire installation. The Contractor shall, in advance of the work, furnish instructions to the General Contractor as to his requirements for equipment and material installation of any kind, whether or not specifically mentioned on drawings or in the specifications, and shall include recesses, chases in walls, and all required openings in the structure. Should furnishing this information be neglected, delayed or incorrect and additional cuttings are found to be required, the cost of the same shall be charged to this Contractor. C. Contractor shall verify and coordinate pipe routing with location of all electrical rooms, elevator equipment rooms, telecom/data rooms, and other rooms dedicated to the housing of switchgear, panels, or other electrical equipment. In no case shall piping be installed within or above the ceiling of such rooms. 1.9 SUBMITTAL DATA (Also see General Conditions) A. Submittal Requirements: 1. Furnish, all at one time, prior to any installation, within the time noted below, six (6) copies of valid submittal data on all fixtures, material, equipment and devices. Each submitted item shall be indexed and referenced to these specifications and to identification numbers on fixtures and equipment schedules. 2. Manufacturers submittal literature and shop drawings are required on all items to ensure the latest and most complete manufacturer's data is available for review. Requirements of the submittals and Engineer's submittal notes are a part of the work of this Division except that Engineer's notes may not be used as a means of increasing the scope of work of this Division. 3. Submittals will be checked for general conformance with the design concept of the project but the review does not guarantee quantities shown and does not supersede requirements of this Division to properly install work. 4. To be valid, all submittals must: a. Be delivered to the Architect's office within thirty-five (35) days of award of the contract. Contractor shall make time allowance for Engineer s review, return of comments, if any, and resubmittal if required. Corrections or changes in submittals returned as inadequate or incomplete shall be accomplished within this time limit. PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 b. Clearly indicate and label as such any items proposed as substitution for that specified or shown on plans. c. Include all pertinent construction, installation, performance and technical data. d. Have all product data sheets clearly labeled to indicate the individual items being submitted. In addition, all required options and accessories shall be clearly marked. i. Product data sheets corresponding to items indicated on plans shall be clearly labeled with the corresponding fixture or equipment tag number. ii. Product data sheets corresponding to items indicated in specifications shall be clearly labeled with the specification section, page and item numbers. e. Include, for every item which differs in size, configuration, connections, service, accessibility or any other significant way, a drawing to the same (or larger) scale as to the pertinent portions of the contract drawings. In this drawing show a complete layout of the system except that which is identical to the contract drawings, unless the unchanged portions must be shown to indicate such things as clearances. This drawing, together with the contract design drawings must show the complete system as revised to accommodate the proposed alternate. B. Substitution Requirements: 1. Any items included in submittals and proposed by the Contractor as substitution for that specified or shown on plans shall be submitted within thirty five (35) days of award of the contract. After such time, proposed substitutions shall not be accepted for review, and the Contractor shall submit all items as specified or shown on plans. a. For each item proposed as substitution for that specified or shown on plans, copies of product data sheets for the specified item shall be placed side by side with product data sheets for the proposed substitution item within the submittal. i. In addition to the Submittal Requirements for labeling listed above, product data sheets for the specified item shall be clearly labeled SPECIFIED ITEM, NOT SUBMITTED. Product data sheets for the corresponding proposed substitution item shall be clearly labeled PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION. b. Provide calculations and other detailed data justifying how any items proposed as substitution were selected for proposal. Data must be complete enough to permit detailed comparison of every significant characteristic for which the specified item was analyzed during design. 2. It shall be the Contractor s responsibility to provide sufficient information to allow the Engineer to analyze any proposed alternate. If inadequate information is provided, the proposal will not be approved and resubmittal will not be allowed. 3. The Contractor shall provide or perform tests required by Engineer for purpose of judging acceptability of proposed substitutions. 4. The Contractor assumes full responsibility that alternate items and procedures will 15400-4 PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 meet the job requirements and is responsible for cost of redesign and of modifications to this and other parts of work caused by alternate items furnished under work in this Section. In view of these responsibilities, it is the purpose of these specifications to establish procedures to ensure that the Contractor has considered all the ramifications of proposed alternates before submitting them for review. Submittals which do not comply with the requirements of these specifications or which indicate proposed alternates that were selected without proper regard to the requirements of the job will not be approved. No more than one proposed alternate will be considered for each item. 5. Alternate items installed without Engineer's approval will be replaced with specified items at Contractor's expense. 6. The Architect or his authorized representative shall be the sole judge as to the quality and suitability of proposed alternate equipment, fixtures or materials. Decisions of the Architect or that of his representative shall be final and conclusive. 1.10 UNINSPECTED WORK A. Contractor shall not allow or cause any of his work to be covered up before it has been duly inspected, tested and approved by the Owner, Architect or any other authorized inspectors having legal jurisdiction over his work. Should he fail to observe the above, he shall uncover the work and, after it has been inspected, tested and approved, recover it at his own expense. 1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS (Also see General Conditions) A. Contractor shall provide and keep up-to-date a complete "as-built" record set of blueline prints which shall show every change from the original drawings and the exact "as-built" locations and sizes of the work provided under this Section of the specifications. This set shall include locations, dimensions, depth of buried piping, cleanouts, shut-off valves, sewer invert locations, plugged wyes, tees, etc. On completion of the work, the Contractor shall incorporate all as-built information on a set of reproducible tracings provided by the Architect and this set of reproducibles shall be delivered to the Architect. 1.12 GUARANTEES (Also see General Conditions) A. Contractor shall guarantee the entire plumbing and piping systems unconditionally for a period of one (1) year after final acceptance. If, during this period, any materials, equipment, or any part of the systems fail to function properly, the Contractor shall make good the defects promptly and without any expense to the Owner. B. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to any part of the premises caused by leaks in pipelines or equipment furnished and installed under this Section for a period of one (1) year after date of acceptance of his work. C. All equipment and fixtures shall carry manufacturer's warranty against defective parts or poor workmanship for not less than one (1) year. See specific equipment specifications for extended warranty requirements. PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT (See Schedules on Drawings) A. General: All materials, as specified or required in the work, shall be new, free from defects and imperfections. B. Pipe and Fittings: 1. Soil and Waste Piping: a. Soil and waste piping within the building itself and outside within five feet (5') of the foundation, shall be no-hub cast iron pipe and fittings, asphaltum coated, free from defects, and shall comply with CISPI. Standard 301, ASTM A-888 or ASTM A-74. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. Fittings shall be made up with "Husky" SD 4000 series or Clamp All HI-TORQ 125 series stainless steel type 304 couplings and shall conform to ASTM C1540 & ASTM C564 except all above ground vent pipe fittings may be made with "Anaco" or "Tyler" stainless steel two band couplings conforming to CISPI Standard 310. 2. Vent Piping: a. Concealed or underground vent piping shall be cast iron pipe and fittings as specified for soil and waste piping. b. Exposed vent piping shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, ASTM A53, with black cast iron recessed drainage fittings. i. All vents through roof shall terminate with vandal proof caps (Refer to Roof Flashing herein). 3. Domestic Water Piping: a. Piping within the building and above grade shall be Type "L" ASTM B88, hard drawn copper tubing with wrought copper sweat fittings ANSI B16.18 and B16.22. b. Outdoor underground piping in sizes 2-1/2" and 3" shall be Type "L" ASTM B88, hard drawn copper as specified for water piping within the building. Piping 2" and smaller shall be Type "K" ASTM B88, hard drawn copper with wrought copper sweat fittings ANSI B16.18 and B16.22. c. Piping below the building floor shall be Type "K" soft annealed copper tubing with no fittings below the slab. 4. Gas Piping: a. Concealed gas piping within the building shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-53 using 150 pound banded malleable iron screwed fittings for piping 2" and smaller and weld type steel fittings for piping 2-1/2" and larger. b. Exposed gas piping outside the building shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-53 using galvanized 150 pound banded galvanized malleable iron screwed fittings for piping in sizes 2" and smaller and seamless weld type steel fittings for all piping in sizes 2-1/2" and larger. 15400-6 PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 c. Underground gas piping shall be SDR-11 Polyethylene PE2406 (Yellow) as manufactured by Driscoplex. Fittings shall be socket fusion weld Polyethylene as manufactured by Performance Pipe or Central, PE2406 (Yellow) complying with ASTM, D2513. Where required provide "Lyco" or Double "O" seal transition fittings between steel and polyethylene as manufactured by Central, all identified and approved for gas service. A 14 gauge copper tracer wire shall be installed with and attached to piping and shall terminate above grade at each end. Underground polyethylene piping shall be installed by personnel certified by the pipe manufacturer as having received instructions directly from the pipe manufacturer's field representative. Contractors not having certified personnel will be required to have a factory representative of the pipe manufacturer visit the site at the time of underground pipe installation and provide the required instructions. All required cost for training and certification shall be paid for by Contractor. i. Upon completion of the gas piping underground installation, Contractor shall submit a written report directly to the Architect stating that all materials installed are as specified and approved, and that installation was performed by factory certified personnel and tested to 60 P.S.I. 5. Indirect Waste Piping. a. Shall be Type "L" copper as specified for water piping. 6. Air Conditioning Condensate Drain Piping. a. Shall be Type "M" copper as specified for water piping. 7. All exposed piping at plumbing fixtures shall be chrome plated yellow brass except exposed pipes in shop or utility areas. 8. Unions or flanges shall be furnished and installed at each threaded connection to all equipment or valves. The unions or flanges shall be located so that the piping can be easily disconnected for removal of the equipment, tank, or valve, and shall be of the type specified in the following schedule. a. Unions: i. Black Steel Pipe: 250 pound screwed black malleable iron, ground joint, brass to iron seat. ii. iii. Galvanized Steel Pipe: 250 pound screwed galvanized malleable iron, ground joint, brass to iron seat. Copper or Brass Tubing: 150 pound cast bronze or copper, ground joint, nonferrous seat with ends, by Walseal, Nibco or Mueller. b. Flanges: Tube Turn or approved equal, raised face 150 pound class forged steel, weld, neck or slip-on type conforming to ASA B16.5 and ASTM A181. For copper piping systems, provide flanges conforming to ANSI B16.24. The faces of the flanges being connected to be alike in all cases. Locate flanges so that the piping can be easily disconnected for removal of the equipment or valve. Gasket material shall be of material suiting the service of the opening PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 system in which installed and which conforms to its respective ANSI Standard (A21.11. B16.21). Provide materials that will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and thermal conditions of the fluid being carried. 9. All piping on roof shall be supported by pipe supports as manufactured by MAPA Products. Products by Miro Industries and Erico shall be accepted for submittal review. a. Pressurized Piping: i. For pipe sizes 1 and less: MS-1 single post, adjustable height pipe support. ii. iii. For pipe sizes 2 ½ and less: MS-4 adjustable, roller pipe support. For pipe sizes 4 and less: MS-5 adjustable, roller pipe support. b. Gravity System Piping 2 and Less: MS-1 single post, adjustable height pipe support. 10. All underground non-metallic piping shall have 14 gauge copper "Tracer Wire" continuous for entire length. C. Valves: 1. General: a. Piping systems shall be supplied with valves arranged so as to give complete and regulating control of each building and piping systems throughout the building, and located so all parts are easily accessible and maintained. i. Valve Design: Rising stem or outside screw and yoke stems. Non-rising stem valves may be used where space conditions prevent full extension of rising stems. ii. iii. iv. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. Operators: 1. Hand wheels fastened to valve stem for all valves other than quarter turn. 2. Lever handles on quarter-turn valves, 6 inch and 8 inch and larger gear operated, except for plug valves. Provide plug valves with square heads and operating wrench. 3. Provide gear operator for valves 8 inch or larger. Extended stems: Where piping insulation is indicated or specified, valves shall be equipped with 2 extended handles of non-thermal conductive material. Also provide a protective sleeve that allows operation of the valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing the insulation. Supply with memory stops, which are fully adjustable after insulation is applied. v. End Connection: 2 inch and under shall be threaded, 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be flanged or full lug style. 15400-8 PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 2. Approved Manufacturers. The following manufacturers (or equal) shall be accepted for submittal review provided that all features and options are equivalent to the corresponding items as specified. a. General valves. i. NIBCO ii. iii. Hammond Milwaukee b. Below grade domestic water shut-off valves (gate valves) 2 and larger. i. NIBCO. ii. iii. Clow. Mueller. c. Butterfly Valves. i. NIBCO. ii. iii. Demco. Dezuric. d. Plug Valves. i. Hammond. ii. Milwaukee. e. Check valves, lift type. i. Hammond. 3. Valves and cocks shall be installed in locations as indicated on plans per the following usage criteria: a. Below grade domestic water shut-off valves 1-1/2 and smaller. i. Gate valve. b. Below grade domestic water shut-off valves 2 and larger. i. Resilient seated gate valve. c. Above grade domestic water shut-off valves 2 and smaller. i. Ball valve. d. Above grade domestic water shut-off valves 2-1/2 and greater. i. Butterfly valve. e. Hot water return balancing valves. i. Manual circuit balancing valve. f. Above grade gas shut-off cocks. PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 i. Ball valve (for gas service). g. Below grade gas shut-off cocks. i. Polyethylene ball valve (for gas service). h. Check valves, general, horizontal. i. Check valve, swing type. i. Check valves, general, vertical, 2 and smaller. i. Check valve, lift type. j. Check valves, general, vertical, 2-1/2 and larger. i. Check valves, wafer-style spring actuated. k. Resilient Seated Gate Valves, 2-Inch and Larger. i. Valves shall conform to AWWA C-509 and C515, fusion-bonded epoxy coating inside and out, meets or exceeds AWWA C-550, ductile iron body, rubber encapsulated D.I. wedge, rubber bonnet gasket, low torque operation, full diameter waterway, flanged, mechanical joint or ring-tite, UL/FM listed and approved. Provide complete with traffic weight cast iron valve box with cast iron cover and operating wrench. 4. Ball Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller. 1. Acceptable Valves: NIBCO F-607-RW OS&Y or F-609-RW NRS or M-609-RW, or approved equal by Clow or Mueller. a. Valves shall be rated 250 F: 330 psig600 PSI CWP, shall have 2-piece full port lead free dezincification resistant bronze bodies with TFE seats and seals, stainless steel stem, separate packing nut with blow-out proof adjustable stem packing, and vented stainless steel ball. Valves shall conform to ASTMB371 C69300, or ASTM B-584 C87850and conform to MSS-SP-110 and NSF-61-G. i. Acceptable Valves: NIBCO T-68580-LF (threaded), or approved equal. 5. Gas Shut-Off Cocks, Above Grade, 4 and Smaller. a. Ball valves (for gas service) shall be rated at 150 WSP 600 WOG, UL listed, bronze body, stainless steel ball, and threaded ends. Valve shall be A.G.A. certified. i. Acceptable Valves: NIBCO T-FP-600, or approved equal. 6. Gas Shut-Off Cocks, Below Grade: a. Valves: Nordstrom Poly-Gas polyethylene gas valves or equal. Valves shall meet the requirements of ASTM D-2513 and ANSI B16.40. b. Valve boxes: cast iron tops marked GAS, high-impact heavy-duty ABS valve can as manufactured by C.P. Test Services-VALVCO, Inc. or equal. 15400-10 PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 D. Gas Pressure Regulators: Shall be of the manufacturer, model and sizes as indicated on the drawings. Regulators installed in vaults shall be entirely corrosion proof and approved by the Gas Utility. E. For flexible connectors at rooftop mechanical equipment, provide corrosion resistant coated stainless steel gas appliance connector as manufactured by BrassCraft. 1. Model numbers shall be sized based on the connector flow capacity chart using the I.D. (Inside Diameter) dimension. a. Model number CSSL, ¼ inside diameter, 3/8 outside diameter with twenty-four (24 ) length hose at maximum 40,000 Btu per hour capacity. b. Model number CSSC, ½ inside diameter, 5/8 outside diameter with twenty-four (24 ) length hose at maximum 150,000 Btu per hour capacity. c. Model number CSSB, ¾ inside diameter, 7/8 outside diameter with twenty-four (24 ) length hose at maximum 290,900 Btu per hour capacity. 2. Provide full line size gas cock upstream of flex connection on hard pipe per Specifications. (See also Part C valves) F. Cleanouts: Shall be Jay R. Smith, Zurn or Josam. 1. General: Provide cast-iron ferrule and countersunk brass clean-out plug with round cast iron access frame and heavy duty secured top cover. 2. Wall Cleanouts: Jay R. Smith No. 4472 for steel pipe and Jay R. Smith No. 4532 for cast iron pipe. 3. Floor Cleanouts: Jay R. Smith No. 4023 or 4028, bronze plug and non-skid nickel bronze top. 4. Cleanouts to Grade: Jay R. Smith No. 4258 or Jay R. Smith No. 4253 with X-H bronze plug and X-X-H non-skid cover with lifting device set flush with surface for concrete areas. Asphalt or nonsurfaced areas shall be installed with ring of concrete poured around the bottom flange six inches (6") below surface. Use cast iron soil pipe on cleanout risers. For cleanouts in non-traffic areas, terminate cleanout plug in concrete yard box. G. Access Panels: Wall access panels shall be minimum 12" x 12" for concealed valves and other equipment unless otherwise specified or indicated. Ceiling access panels shall be 18" x 18" minimum. Access panels shall be located and positioned for ready access and service of equipment housed within. Where access panels are specified with keyed cylinder locks, all such locks shall be identically keyed. 1. Wall, Non-Fire Rated: Elmdor/Stoneman DW-SS-CL, drywall, stainless steel finish, cylinder lock. 2. Ceiling, Non-fire Rated: Elmdor/Stoneman DW, drywall, prime coated finish, screwdriver latch. 3. Wall, Fire Rated: Elmdor/Stoneman FR-SS-CL, fire rated, stainless steel finish, cylinder lock. PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 4. Ceiling, Fire rated: Elmdor/Stoneman FRC, Fire rated, prime coated finish, return latch. H. Yard Boxes & Vaults: For service shut-off valves on gas and domestic water; for pressure regulator assemblies and for cleanouts, shall be Brooks Products or Fraser Cement Products Co., rectangular concrete type with vandal-proof cast iron cover and name of service clearly marked on cover. Box shall be of size to permit full range of valve operation and to permit easy removal of valve assembly. Vaults shall be sectional type. I. Pipe Supports: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, shall be as follows: 1. The Contractor shall furnish and install all miscellaneous iron work including angles, channels, etc., required to appropriately support the various piping systems. Hanger spacing and location shall conform to Uniform Plumbing Code requirements. 2. All horizontal runs of piping within the building to be supported from the structural framing with steel rods and split ring hangers, B-Line, Grinnell Company, Tolco, or approved equal. Steel rods shall be secured to overhead framing with side beam connectors. Where necessary, install angle iron between framing to accommodate hanger rods. Where several pipes are running together, Unistrut, B-Line or Powerstrut channels with clamps may be used in lieu of individual pipe hangers, and supported from structure as herein specified. Submit test data for type of hanger supports to be provided. For support conditions other than specified herein, the Contractor shall submit method of support for approval prior to any installation. 3. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: a. General: Provide factory fabricated horizontal hangers and supports complying with one of the following MSS types listed to suit horizontalpiping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping systems. i. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: (MSS Type 1.) B-Line B 3100 ii. Adjustable Swivel Pipe Rings: (MSS Type 5) B-Line B3690 4. Vertical-Piping Clamps: a. General: Provide factory fabricated vertical-piping clamps complying with the following types listed, to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide copper-plated clamps for copper-piping systems. b. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: (MSS Type 8) B-Line B3373 5. Hanger-Rod Attachments: a. General: Provide factory fabricated hanger-rod attachments B-Line, Tolco or approved equal, selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping hangers 15400-12 PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-58 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of hanger-rod attachment to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated hanger-rod attachments for copper-piping systems. b. Side beam eye socket, Tolco Fig. #57 for rod sizes 3/8" dia. and Tolco Fig. #25-30-251 for rod sizes 1/2" dia. 6. Building Attachments: a. General: Provide factory fabricated building attachments, selected by Installer to suit building structural framing conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated building attachments for copper-piping systems. 7. Hanger Rods and Spacing shall conform to the following table: Pipe Sizes Spacing Rods 2 Inch and Smaller 6 Feet 3/8 Inch 2-1/2 Inch to 3 Inch 8 Feet 1/2 Inch 4 Inch and larger 8 Feet 5/8 Inch 8. Hangers and Supports shall be adequate to maintain alignment and prevent sagging and shall be placed within 18 inches of joint. Support shall be provided at each horizontal branch connection. 9. Provide lateral bracing as manufactured by B-Line or approved equal for all piping to prevent swaying or movement in accordance with SMACNA "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Piping Systems". Piping smaller than indicated in the guidelines shall be provided with bracing as specified for the smallest size indicated. The entire water distribution system shall be properly braced and will not move due to the action of quick closing of valves. 10. Miscellaneous Supports, Wall Brackets, Etc.: Provide where required in accordance with the best standard practices of the trade. Submit shop drawings for all fabricated supports. 11. Isolators. All piping which is not isolated from contact with the building by its insulation shall be installed with a manufactured type isolator. Isolators shall be B-Line vibra clamp and cushion, Super Strut, Stoneman "Trisolator", or approved equal. Piping shall be installed and supported in a manner to provide for expansion without strains. Guides shall be properly installed to ensure this requirement. J. Equipment and Fixtures: 1. Fixtures: a. See schedule on drawings. PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 b. Accessible plumbing fixtures shall comply with all of the requirements of CBC Section 1115B. Heights and location of all fixtures shall be in according to CBC Section 1115B.4 and Table 1115B-1. Fixture controls shall comply with CBC Section 1115B.4.4.4 for showers, 1115B.4.3.1 for lavatories, 1115B.4.1.5 for toilets and 1115B.4.2.3 for urinals. Sinks shall not exceed 6-1/2 in depth, CBC Section 1115B.4.7.1. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers. a. The following manufacturers (or equal) shall be accepted for submittal review provided that all features and options are equivalent to the corresponding items as specified on plans and in specifications: i. Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures. ii. iii. iv. 1. American Standard. 2. Kohler. Flushometer Valves. 1. Sloan. Toilet Seats. 1. Olsonite. 2. Church. Enameled Cast Iron and Stainless Steel Classroom Sinks, 5 Deep. 1. Haws. v. Classroom Sink Bubblers. vi. vii. viii. ix. 1. Just. Stainless Steel Sinks. 1. Elkay. 2. Just. Faucets. 1. Chicago. Lavatory and Sink Drains. 1. McGuire. 2. Elkay. Angle Stops / Supplies. 1. Chicago. x. Enameled Cast Iron Service Sinks. xi. 1. Ceco. Trap Primers. 15400-14 PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 xii. xiii. xiv. xv. xvi. xvii. xviii. xix. xx. xxi. xxii. 1. Mifab. 2. Precision Plumbing Products. Water Hammer Arrestors. 1. Zurn. 2. Precision Plumbing Products. Floor Drains. 1. Zurn. 2. Jay. R. Smith. Roof Drains and Overflow Drains. 1. Zurn 2. Jay R. Smith. Floor Sinks. 1. Zurn. Drinking Fountains. 1. Haws. 2. Sunroc. Grease and Sand/Oil Interceptors. 1. Jensen Precast. Thermal Expansion Tanks. 1. Wilkins. 2. Watts. 3. Amtrol. Hose Bibbs. 1. Acorn. 2. Woodford. Recessed Hose Bibbs. 1. Acorn. Gas Pressure Regulators. 1. Fischer. 2. American Meter Company. Backflow Preventers. 1. Wilkins. PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 xxiii. xxiv. xxv. xxvi. PART 3 - EXECUTION 2. Watts. Instantaneous Electric Water Heaters. 1. Chonomite. Electric Storage Tank Type Water Heaters. 1. Rheem. 2. Bradford White. 3. American. Gas Fired Storage Tank Type Water Heaters. 1. Rheem. 2. Bradford White. 3. American Hot Water Circulation Pumps. 1. Grundfos. 3. Furnish complete with necessary trim, including stops. All trim and fittings shall be chrome-plated brass including handles, supply tailpieces, traps and escutcheons. 4. Connections to fixtures shall be in accordance with code requirements except as exceeded herein or on the drawings and in no case less than the supply stop size. 5. All plumbing fixture faucets submitted for review shall have identification label or certification showing compliance with California TITLE 24, PART 5, ARTICLE I, "Energy Conservation Standards". ARTICLE I, T20-1406; ARTICLE 2, T20-1525 and ARTICLE 4, 1604 and 1606. 6. Minimum waste sizes shall be four-inch (4") for water closets and two inch (2") for lavatories. 7. Steel plate supports shall be provided for all wall hung fixtures. Supports shall be 3/8-inch thick x 6 inch wide steel plates recessed and lag screwed to wood studs or welded to steel studs and tapped for fixture bolts. Length and number of plates as required to satisfactorily support the fixtures installed. 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Locations and Accessibility: Install equipment for ease of maintenance and repair. If changes in the indicated locations or arrangements are made by the Contractor, they shall be made without additional charges. B. Openings: Furnish information to the other trades on size and location of openings which are required in walls, slabs, roof, for piping and equipment at the proper times. C. Closing-In of Uninspected Work: Do not allow or cause any of the work to be covered up or enclosed until it has been inspected, tested, and approved by the Architect. Any work 15400-16 PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 enclosed or covered prior to such inspection and test shall be uncovered and, after it has been inspected, tested, and approved, make all repairs with such materials as may be necessary to restore all work, including that of other trades, to its original and proper condition. D. Before laying of any pipe or digging of any trenches, Contractor shall determine by actual excavation and measurement exact locations and depth of existing utility and service lines to which he is going to connect. In event depth of existing sewer main or storm drain is not sufficient to permit installation of piping as detailed on drawings or to make connection in manner indicated, Contractor shall confer with the Architect, Owner's representative and Engineer for Direction. E. Excavation, Trenching and Backfill: Perform all necessary trench excavation, shoring, backfilling and compaction required for the proper laying of the pipe lines. 1. The Contractor shall coordinate the layout of all below grade piping and components with the General Contractor prior to bid to determine the extent of required sawcutting, excavation, alterations, and subsequent repair/restoration of all affected hardscape and softscape surfaces. All such items shall be included in bid. 2. Backfill shall be clean soil free from rocks and debris. Compact to ninety percent (90%) of surrounding soil. All piping shall be installed in a minimum 6" sand bed and covered with 6" of sand prior to backfill. Continue backfill with materials free of rocks and debris, properly moistened and mechanically tapered and compacted to 90% of surrounding soil. 3. Water, soil and waste piping shall have twenty-four (24") of cover minimum, except all PVC pipe material and all gas piping shall have eighteen (18") of cover minimum. All other pipe shall have not less than eighteen inches (18") of cover, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Offset gas and water piping as required to permit crossover of underground piping systems, and electrical conduit systems. 4. Bottoms of Trenches: Cut to grade and excavate bell holes to ensure the pipes bearing for their entire length upon the outside periphery of the lower third of the pipe. 5. Water piping shall not be run in the same trench with sewer or drainage piping unless separated as required by the CPC. 6. All horizontal soil and waste piping 3 and smaller shall be installed to a uniform grade of not less than one-fourth inch (1/4") per foot. All horizontal soil and waste piping 4 and larger shall be installed to a uniform grade of not less than one-eighth inch (1/8") per foot, unless otherwise indicated or directed. F. Piping Installation: 1. All piping shall be concealed in finished portion of the building except where otherwise indicated or directed at the time the work is done. All piping shall be installed to clear all framing members and beams, even if drawings do not indicate same. Contractor shall constantly check the work of other trades so as to prevent any interference with the installation of this work. 2. All piping into stem walls and footings shall be double half lap wrapped with 1/8" thick PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 "Armaflex" insulation. The Contractor shall also provide blocked out areas in stem wall and footing as required for the installation of the piping. All piping shall avoid the lower 9" of the footing and the Contractor shall coordinate and provide dropped footings as required for the installation of the underground piping. 3. Unions shall be installed on one side of all screwed shut-off valves, at both sides of screwed automatic valves and on all by-passes, at all equipment connections and elsewhere as indicated or required for ease of installation and dismantling. 4. Connections between copper tubing and equipment shall be with Mueller Brass Company, or approved equal, brass stream line copper to P.P.S. ground joint unions. 5. Hot and cold water supplies to lavatories and sinks shall be provided with ninety degree (90 ) drop-ear copper to pipe thread elbows. Bolt securely to backing plates located between wall studs to provide a rigid anchor for exposed supply pipes and stops. 6. Corrosion Protection: a. General. i. Corrosion protection shall be provided for all below grade cast iron and copper piping and associated valves and fittings. Such piping shall be protected from corrosion by encasement in a polyethylene protective wrapping, referred to hereafter as polywrap. Although not intended to be a completely air and water tight enclosure, the polywrap shall provide a continuous barrier between the pipe and surrounding bedding and backfill. b. Materials. i. Cast iron piping encasement. ii. iii. 1. The polywrap shall be minimum 8 mil. in thickness, group 2, linear low density, flat tube, natural (clear) virgin polyethylene film formed into tubes or sheets as required. Material shall meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA C105, ANSI A21.5 and ASTM A674. 2. The polywrap shall be as manufactured by Northtown Company or approved equal. Copper piping encasement. 1. The polywrap shall be minimum 6 mil. in thickness, group 2, linear low density, flat tube, natural (clear) virgin polyethylene film formed into tubes or sheets as required. Material shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D1248. 2. The polywrap shall be as manufactured by Northtown Company or approved equal. The minimum Polywrap flat tube width for each pipe diameter shall be as follows: Pipe Size / Type Polywrap Flat Tube Width ½ to ¾ copper 2 1 to 1-½ copper 3 15400-18 PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 iv. 2 copper 4 2-1/2 copper 5 3 copper 6 2 to 3 cast iron 14 4 cast iron 16 6 cast iron 20 The polywrap shall be secured as specified with 2 inch wide pressure sensitive plastic tape not less than 10 mils thick. c. Installation. 1. Tape shall be Scotchwrap No. 50, Polyken No. 900, Tapecoat CT, Johns-Manville No. V-10 Trantex or approved equal. i. The polyethylene tubing shall be cut into lengths approximately 2 feet longer than the pipe sections. Slip the tube around the pipe, centering it to provide a 1-ft overlap on each adjacent pipe section, and bunching it accordion fashion lengthwise until it clears the pipe ends. Lower the pipe into the trench and make up the pipe joint with the preceding section of pipe.. A shallow bell hole must be made at each joint to facilitate installation of the polywrap. The bunched-up polywrap shall be pulled from the preceding length of pipe, slipped over the end of the new length of pipe, and secured in place with one circumferential turn of tape plus enough overlap to assure firm adhesion. The end of the polywrap shall be slipped from the new pipe section over the end of the first wrap until it overlaps the joint at the end of the preceding length of pipe and tape it in place. The loose wrapping on the barrel of the pipe shall be pulled snugly around the barrel of the pipe and excess material folded over the top of the pipe and the folds held in place by means of short strips of adhesive tape, at about 3 foot intervals along the pipe. ii. iii. Rips, punctures or other damage to the tube shall be repaired with the adhesive tape or pieces of tube material secured with tape. Bends and reducers in the line shall be covered with polyethylene in the same manner as pipe. Valves, tees, crosses and outlets shall be wrapped with flat sheets of the same material. The sheets shall be passed under valves and brought up around the body to the stem. Edges shall be brought together, folded twice and secured with the adhesive tape. G. Sleeves: Shall be plastic or galvanized steel where pipes pass through concrete walls or floor slabs. 1. Isolate pipes through ground floor slabs with Kraft paper, plastic tape or similar materials unless conduit is specified or indicated. 2. Sleeves for pipes through exterior walls shall be non-metallic with minimum 2 weep ring as manufactured by Link Seal. Pipe shall be sealed with Link Seal modular seal with EPDM seal elements. PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 3. Sleeves in or through fire rated walls shall be per U.L. Fire Resistance System No. WL1146 for drywall construction, and U.L. Fire Resistance System No. CAJ1044 for concrete construction. See architectural plans for all locations of rated walls. H. Pipe Joints and Connections: 1. Copper Tubing and Brass Pipe with Threadless Fittings: a. Solder joints for copper shall be made with 95/5 lead free solder in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for the service intended. b. Use threaded adapters on copper tubing where threaded connections are required. 2. Welded Joints: All welding to be performed by welders certified as passing ASME Boiler and Pressure Code (Section IX) and shall comply with ANSI Std. B31.1.0 and the American Welding Society, Welding Handbook. I. All closet bends shall be adequately blocked and secured. Trap arms and similar connections installed below the floor level or under concrete slabs shall be adequately supported and anchored to prevent motion in any direction. All piping installed above grade within buildings shall be secured to structural framing with Unistrut or pipe clamps to provide a rigid installation. Piping utilizing gaskets as a seal shall be given prime consideration to providing adequate stability through proper supports and anchors because of its flexible nature. J. Flexible piping of any kind will not be permitted except when indicated on drawings. Provide Hose Master Inc., flexible pipe appliance connector model UNP, female union, male nipple and plastic cover, AGA approved for kitchen equipment only. K. Each pipe penetration of the roof shall be separated from other piping and any roof equipment by a minimum of 18" to insure a proper pipe flashing installation. L. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates: Where pipes pierce finished surfaces, C.P. brass split flanges with setscrew lock shall be provided. M. Installation of Plumbing Fixtures: 1. Install each fixture at the exact height and location shown on the Architectural Drawings. 2. Set fixtures, supplies, trap and trap outlet square with the wall, in line with fixture outlets without any offsets, angles, or bends. 3. Grout joint between the fixtures and the walls or floors with polysulfide or silicone sealant to be smooth, even and watertight. N. Completion of Installation: 1. Cleaning and Flushing: Clean all equipment and materials thoroughly. Leave surface to be painted smooth and clean, ready for painting. 2. Flush each unit of water supply and distribution system thoroughly with clean water at the highest velocities attainable. 3. Clean all piping, valves, traps, water heaters, fixtures and other devices thoroughly and flush or blow out until free of scale, oil silt, sand, sediment, pipe dope and foreign 15400-20 PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 matter of any kind. 3.2 STERILIZATION OF DOMESTIC WATER LINES A. Sterilize water lines by filling with a solution containing fifty (50) parts of chlorine per million parts water and holding the solution therein for at least eight (8) hours with a water head of at least five feet (5') above the highest point in the system. Unless otherwise directed, thoroughly flush each line prior to sterilization. Introduction of sterilizing solution or materials into the lines shall be such as to provide thorough and uniform distribution throughout the system. 1. Operate all valves during the retention period. Following retention period, the heavy chlorinated water shall be flushed from the system with clean water. 2. Continue flushing until the residual chlorine at the end of 24 hours is as required by AWWA C651. 3. All work and certification of performance must be done by an approved laboratory utilizing qualified applications and personnel. 3.3 TESTING i. Upon completion of the domestic water line sterilization, Contractor shall submit sterilization report directly to the Architect stating that all testing was performed as specified and that testing was performed by an approved laboratory utilizing qualified applications and personnel. A. No piping work shall be concealed or covered until piping has been tested, inspected and approved by the Inspector. All piping for plumbing systems shall be completely installed and tested as required by the Uniform Plumbing Code. Test pressures and times indicated are a minimum only. All tests shall be as required by the governing authority as well. Schedule of Test Pressures: System Tested Gauge Test Duration Water 100 PSI Water 4 Hours Gas 60 PSI Air 4 Hours Waste, Vent and Storm Drain: Per California Plumbing Code (Minimum 10 Feet of Head) 3.4 OPERATION INSTRUCTION A. Prior to occupancy or prior to the date of final inspection, whichever may occur first, the Contractor shall prepare two (2) sets of typewritten instructions for the operation of all equipment, valves, etc., specified and furnished as a part of the work under this section, and shall assign a competent person, thoroughly familiar with the job, to demonstrate and instruct a representative of the Owner in the operation of the equipment. The time of said demonstration and instructions shall be arranged with the Owner's representative approximately one (1) week in advance. Verbal instructions shall include shut-off location of gas and water. The Contractor shall assemble all PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 operation and maintenance data supplied by the manufacturers of the various pieces of equipment, all keys and special wrenches required to operate and service the equipment (including keys for yard boxes, gas stops and fixture stops), and all equipment warranties and deliver same to the representative of the Owner on date of said instructions. 3.5 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Each operating and service line shut-off valve shall be identified by a 19 ga. brass tag with stamped, engraved type of service identified and area served, complete with hole and brass chain mounted on valve stem or handle. Tag shall be a minimum of one and one-half inch (1-1/2") in diameter. B. Provide on exterior wall of each building opposite the building's main gas service a sign reading "Gas Shut Off". Sign shall be metal with minimum 1-1/2" high-embossed letters. C. All equipment shall be provided with name plate indicating all pertinent information on it. END OF SECTION 15400-22 PLUMBING 15400-PLUMBING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION SECTION 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING A. Work under this section includes all labor, equipment, material, services, transportation, etc. required for and reasonably incidental to the complete and satisfactory installation of all of the HVAC Systems as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. 1.2 Work included in this section: A. Gas/ Electric Air Conditioning units. B. Volume Dampers. C. Ductwork and Accessories. D. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers. E. Duct Insulation. F. Vibration Isolation. G. Test and Balance. H. Submittals and Shop Drawings. I. Record Drawings. J. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. K. Guarantee. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Electrical supply to units. See Electrical Drawings. 1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. This section of the specification shall be considered as a part of the entire specification and all applicable portions of General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division 1 shall apply. B. Erection: The Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge of the erection of the work, together with all necessary journeymen, helpers, and laborers required to properly unload, erect, connect, adjust, start of operate and test the work involved. 1.5 REFERENCES A. AABC - National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance. B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. C. AMCA 300 - Test code for sound rating air-moving devices. D. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation System. E. ARI 270 - Sound rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. F. ASHRAE 52-76 - Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. G. ASTM A90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. H. ASTM A120 - Black and Galvanized Steel Pipe. HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800-1 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 I. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. J. ASTM C518 - Steady State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. K. ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation. L. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. M. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. N. ASTM E96 - Water vapor Transmission of Materials. O. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. P. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. Q. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. R. UL 181 - Factory Made Air Ducts and Connectors. S. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. T. CBC Section 716.3.2.1 Smoke Damper Fire Actuation Methods. U. California Mechanical Code - 2010 Edition. V. ASTM E477 - Method of Testing Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers for Acoustical and Airflow Performance. 1.6 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. Contractor agrees that shop drawings submittals processed by the Owner do not become Contract Documents and are not Change Orders; that the purpose of the shop drawing review is to establish a reporting procedure and is intended for the Contractor's convenience in organizing his work and to permit the Owner to monitor the Contractor's progress and understanding of the design. The process of review of the Contractor's submittals is not of testing the Owner s perception. If deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between shop drawings submittals and the Contract Documents are discovered either prior to or after the shop drawing submittals is processed by the Owner, the Contractor agrees that the Contract Documents shall control and shall be followed. See Division 1 Coordinating and Detailing Activity (CDA). B. Materials and Equipment: As soon as possible and within 60 days after award of the contract, and before their purchase, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner seven bound booklets for approval containing a complete list of materials, specialties and equipment he is to furnish for the installation. Literature shall be standard manufacturer's catalog cuts and items to be installed shall be clearly indicated. All submittals shall be made at one time. C. Each item shall be identified by manufacturer, brand and trade name, number, size, rating and whatever other data is necessary to properly identify and check the materials and equipment. The words: "as specified" will not be considered sufficient identification. D. Accessories, controls, finish, etc., not submitted or identified with the submitted equipment shall be furnished and installed as specified. E. Shop drawings shall be approved only to extent of information indicated. Approval of an item of equipment shall not be construed to mean approval for components for that item for which Contractor has provided no information. F. Approval of shop drawings shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing all controls, wiring, components, etc. which are shown or specified, or all additional controls, wiring, components, etc. required to provide complete and correctly operating mechanical systems. G. Submit product data for the following manufactured products, assemblies, personnel and testing agencies required for this project. 15800-2 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 1. Packaged Gas/ Electric Air conditioning units. 2. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles. 3. Controls. 4. Ductwork and Accessories. 5. Insulation Materials. 6. Fire and Smoke/Fire dampers. 7. Vibration Isolation. 8. Detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms, and copy of AABC National Project Performance Guarantee. 9. Duct Silencers 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Should the Contractor desire to substitute any material, equipment or other items for those specified, he shall submit a complete list, including detailed equipment layouts and performance characteristics within 35 calendar days after the scheduled Start of Construction. Said data shall be submitted in 7 copies, assembled in individual brochures. B. The entire cost of all changes of any type due to substitution for materials specified shall be born by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Owner. C. Unsolicited and voluntary deducts, on the part of the Contractor for substituting unapproved systems and/or equipment, shall not be considered for the purpose of awarding the Contract. D. The contractor shall submit the amount of cost credit to the Contract in the event the proposed substitution is accepted. E. In all cases where substitutions are proposed after bids are received, the Contractor shall bear the cost of evaluation on the basis of 2-1/2 times technical salaries of engineering personnel involved. F. Substitutions will only be allowed during the bid period as an addendum. 1.8 AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFIED EQUIPMENT A. Verify prior to bidding that all specified equipment is available and can be obtained in time for installation during orderly and timely progress of the work. B. In the event that specified items will not be so available, notify the Owner prior to receipt of bids. C. Costs of delays because of non-availability of specified items, when such delays could have been avoided by proper investigation on the part of the Contractor, will be back-charged as necessary and shall not be born by the Owner. 1.9 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The contractor shall arrange and pay for one set of white prints of the HVAC drawings, which he shall alter in red to show all changes made to the original layout. These drawings shall be kept current. B. The contractor shall deliver these completed to the Owner when the job is finished and accepted prior to final payment. 1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, binders with durable plastic covers. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800-3 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 INSTRUCTIONS", and title of project. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. B. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents with each Product or system description identified. 1. Part 1: Directory listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. C. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be returned after final inspection, with Owner comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. D. Submit final volumes (revised) within ten days after final inspection. 1.11 GUARANTEES A. The Contractor, in accepting this contract, binds himself to replace or repair at his own expense any defect in workmanship or material which may appear within a period of one year from the date of the final acceptance of the building, and to pay for all resulting damage which shall appear within the said period; provided always that the Contractor shall not be liable for anything attributable to acts of the agents of the Owner, or for ordinary wear. Also, given date of work performed by the Contractor be accepted as complete, he shall agree to correct any deficiencies or omissions in respect to the plans or specifications which may appear in the afore-mentioned twenty-four month period. B. The Contractor guarantees that all piping as provided in this specification will be free from all obstructions, and that all piping will be tight and drip free. C. All refrigerant compressors shall carry a five-year manufacturer's warranty. 1.12 LOCAL CONDITIONS A. The Contractor and trade submitting tenders on this work shall visit and will be deemed to have visited the site to ensure that they are familiar with all conditions relating to the work. Failure to visit the site will in no way relieve the successful Contractor of the necessity of furnishing any material or performing any work that may be required to complete the work in accordance with the drawings and specifications without additional cost to the Owner. 1.13 RULES, REGULATIONS AND CODES A. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest California Mechanical Code, California Plumbing Code, California Building Code and local rules and regulations, State Fire Marshal regulations, the safety orders of the Division of Industrial Safety; the National Electric Code; the standards of the National Fire Protection Association; American Gas Association; Occupation and Safety Act; American National Standards Institute; American Society of Mechanical Engineers; American Society for Testing and Materials; Installation Standards published by the International Association of Plumbing And Mechanical officials (IAPMO) and 15800-4 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 other applicable laws, codes, or regulations. Nothing in these specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. B. Electrical Work: Motors, electrical apparatus and wiring specified in this section shall conform to the National Electrical Manufacturer's Standards and the National Electric Code and bear the Underwriter's label of approval. C. The Contractor shall furnish, without extra charge, any additional material and labor when and where required to comply with these rules and regulations, though the work be not mentioned in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings. When these Specifications or Drawings call for or describe materials or construction of a better quality or larger sizes than required by the above mentioned rules and regulations, the provisions of these specifications and accompanying drawings shall take precedence. 1.14 FEES AND PERMITS A. The Contractor must obtain and pay all fees for permits, licenses, inspections, etc., which are required by any legally constituted authority. Coordinate exact requirements with the Owner prior to bid. 1.15 COORDINATION A. Following the general arrangement indicated on the Drawings as closely as possible, the Contractor shall coordinate with the architectural, structural, plumbing, electrical and all other trades prior to installation of the materials and equipment to verify adequate space available for installation of the work shown. The Owner shall be immediately notified if an area of conflict occurs between trades. B. The Contractor shall bear all costs incurred for work that must be relocated due to conflicts between trades. C. The Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate all requirements for all points of connection with the General Contractor and other trades prior to bid. 1.16 DRAWINGS A. The work shall be installed as indicated on Drawings, however, changes to accommodate installation of this work with other work, or in order to meet Architectural or structural conditions, shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. B. For the purpose of clarity and legibility, the Drawings are essentially diagrammatic to the extent that many offsets, bonds, unions, special fittings and exact locations are not indicated. The Contractor shall make use of all data in all of the Contract Documents, and shall verify this information at the site. 1.17 INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall not allow or cause any of his work to be covered up or closed in until it has been inspected, tested, approved by all authorities have jurisdiction, and until Project Record drawings have been properly annotated. B. Should any of his work be covered up or closed in before such inspection, he shall, at his own expense, uncover the work to the satisfaction of the inspection party. All related repair work cost shall be borne by the Contractor. C. The contractor shall provide photos for documentation of all mechanical work located behind inaccessible walls and ceilings. 1.18 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF PROPERTY A. Place orders for all equipment in time to prevent any delay in construction schedule or completion of project. If any materials or equipment are not ordered in time, additional charges made by HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800-5 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 equipment manufacturers to complete their equipment in time to meet construction schedule, together with any special handling charges, shall be borne by the contractor. B. Materials shall be delivered in ample quantities from time to time as may be necessary for the uninterrupted progress of the work. They shall be stored as to cause the least obstruction to the premises and distributed so as to prevent overloading to any portion of the structure. C. The Contractor shall provide temporary storage and shop areas that are required at the site for the safe and proper storage of materials, tools, and other items used in the performance of this work. These areas shall be constructed only in approved locations and shall not interfere with the work of any other Contractor. D. All work, equipment and materials shall be protected at all times. The Contractor shall make good all damage caused either directly or indirectly by his own workmen. The Contractor shall also protect his own work from damage. He shall close all pipe and duct openings with caps or plugs during installation. He shall protect all of his equipment and materials against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical injury. Upon completion, all work shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered in a new condition. 1.19 DAMAGE BY LEAKS, ETC. A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to any part of the premises or work of other Contractors, caused by leaks or breaks in the piping or equipment furnished and/or installed under this section, during the construction and guarantee period. 1.20 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT FOR MAINTENANCE A. Install all equipment, piping, etc. to permit access for normal maintenance. Maintain easy access to filters, motors, etc. Install all such equipment and accessories to facilitate maintenance. Perform any relocation of pipes, etc. required to permit access at request of Owner at no additional cost to Owner. B. Furnish and install access doors or panels in walls, floors, and ceilings to permit access to equipment, dampers, and all other items requiring service. Coordinate location of access doors with other trades as required. C. Size access panels (20 x 20 minimum) to allow inspection and removal of all items served. D. Use Milcor style as required for material in which door is installed. Where door is installed in fire rated construction, provide door bearing UL label required for condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials and equipment shall be new and of the best of their respective grades, free from all defects and of the make, brand or quality herein specified or as accepted by the Owner. B. All materials and equipment shall be identified by manufacturer's name or nameplate data. Unidentified material or equipment shall be removed from the site. C. Equipment specified by manufacturer's number shall include all accessories, controls, etc., listed in the catalog as standard with the equipment. Optional or additional accessories shall be furnished as specified. D. Where no specific make of material or equipment is mentioned, any first class product of a reputable manufacturer may be used, provided it conforms to the requirements of the system and meets with the approval of the Owner. E. Equipment and materials damaged during transportation, installation and operation shall be considered as "totally damaged" and shall be replaced with new. Any variance from this clause shall be made only with written approval of the Owner. 15800-6 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 2.2 MANUFACTURER A. Packaged A/C Units: 1. Carrier. 2. Trane. 3. Approved Equal. B. Diffusers, registers, and grilles: 1. Krueger. 2. Anemostat. 3. Titus. C. Thermostats: 1. Carrier. 2. Carrier VVT. D. Vibration Isolation: 1. Mason. 2. M.W. Sausse. 3. Approved equal. 2.3 ROOFTOP PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (48HC) A. EQUIPMENT 1. The unit shall be a fully factory assembled, pre-tested, single-piece heating and cooling unit. Contained within the unit enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, Puron refrigerant charge (R-410A), and all special accessories noted in this specification prior to field start-up. B. Unit Cabinet 1. Constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and coated with a pre--painted baked enamel finish on all externally exposed surfaces. 2. Evaporator fan compartment interior cabinet insulation shall conform to AHRI 210/240 or 340/360 minimum exterior sweat criteria. Interior surfaces shall be insulated with a minimum ½-inch thick, 1 lb. density, flexible fiberglass insulation, neoprene coated on the air side. Aluminum foil-faced fiberglass insulation shall be used in the gas heat compartment. 3. Unit cabinet exterior paint shall be: film thickness, (dry) 0.003 inches minimum, gloss (per ASTM D523, 60_F / 16_C: 60, Hardness: H-2H Pencil Hardness. 4. Return air filters shall be accessible through an easily-removal (tool-less) access door and shall use standard size filters. Filter shall be standard off the shelve sizes. Contractor shall provide filters of the size and quantity as shown on the equipment schedule. 5. Panels covering control box, indoor fan, indoor fan motor, gas compartments, and compressors shall have molded composite handles. 6. Unit shall have a factory--installed internally sloped condensate drain pan, providing a minimum 3/4--in. 14 NPT connection to prevent standing water from accumulating. Pan shall be fabricated of high impact polycarbonate material and shall slide out for cleaning and or maintenance. An alternate vertical drain (3/4--in. NPT) connection shall also be available. All drain pans conform to ASHRAE 62 self draining provisions. HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800-7 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 C. Fans 7. Unit shall have standard exterior electrical and gas piping connections. Alternatively, the unit shall have through-the-base capability for each using a raised, embossed knockout portion of the drain pan. If specified, this option requires the use of the accessory, factory-approved thru-the-base connection kits for water-tight installation. 1. Indoor blower (evaporator fan): a. Centrifugal supply air blower shall have rubber--isolated, cartridge type ball bearings and adjustable belt drive. b. Fan wheel shall be made from steel with a corrosion resistant finish. It shall be a dynamically balanced, double--inlet type with forward--curved blades. c. Evaporator--fan motors shall be continuous operation, open drip--proof. Bearings shall be sealed, permanently lubricated ball bearing type for longer life and lower maintenance. d. Fan motor shall have automatic-reset thermal overload protection, and shall have a maximum continuous BHP rating for continuous duty operation; no safety factors above that rating shall be required. 2. Condenser fans shall be of the direct-driven propeller type, with corrosion-resistant aluminum blades riveted to corrosion-resistant steel supports. They shall be dynamically balanced and discharge air upwards. Condenser-fan motors shall be totally enclosed, thermally protected, and be of a shaft down design to protect from direct contact from harsh environments. 3. Induced--draft blower shall be of the direct driven, single inlet, forward--curved, centrifugal type. It shall be made from aluminized steel with a corrosion-resistant finish and shall be dynamically balanced. D. Compressor(s) E. Coils 1. Fully hermetic, scroll type for each independent refrigeration circuit, cooled by refrigerant gas passing through motor windings. 2. Factory mounted on rubber grommets and internally spring mounted for vibration isolation. 3. Compressor shall be protected from an over-temperature and over-amperage conditions by internal motor overloads. 4. Compressor shall have internal line break thermal, current overload and high pressure differential protection. 1. Standard evaporator and condenser coils shall have copper lanced plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless internally grooved copper tubes with all joints brazedcoils shall be leak tested at 150 psig and pressure tested to 650 psig, and qualified to UL 1995 burst test at 1980 psig. F. Heating Section 1. Induced-draft combustion type with energy saving direct-spark ignition system and redundant main gas valve. Positive pressure heat exchanger designs shall not be allowed. 2. Heat exchangers for models 65,000 BTUH cooling and below shall meet the requirement of the California Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) low-nox emissions of 40 nanograms per joule or less. Heat exchanger primary tubes shall be 409 stainless steel. Heating shall have single stage control. Warranty shall be 15 years. 3. Heat exchangers for models >65,000 BTUH cooling shall be of the tubular-section type constructed of Stainless Steel for corrosion resistance. Heating shall have two-stage control. Warranty shall be 10 years. 15800-8 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 4. All gas piping shall enter the unit at a single location. Gas entry shall be capable through side or bottom for unit. 5. All factory-installed orifices are for operation up to 2,000 feet of altitude. For altitudes between 2,000 ft and 7,000 ft, a factory certified kit shall be furnished for field installation. G. Refrigerant Components 1. Each refrigerant circuit shall include: H. Filter Section a. One balanced port thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) with removable power element. b. Solid core refrigerant filter drier. c. Refrigerant pressure gage ports and connections on suction and discharge lines. d. Pressure gauge access through a specially designed access port in the top panel of the unit to facilitate correct and accurate condenser pressure by enabling the user to keep the compressor access panel on. 1. Standard filter rack shall accept 2-in. filters 2. Contractor shall furnish and install filters of the sizes and quantity as shown on the equipment schedule. I. Controls and Safeties 1. Unit shall be complete with self-contained low voltage control circuit protected by a resettable circuit breaker on the 24V transformer side. Transformer shall have 75VA capability. 2. Unit shall be controlled by standard electromechanical from manufacturer and connect to Bard by control contractor. Contractor to provide relay contacts and other accessories to connect to Bard Lead/Lag Controller 3. Include central control terminal board to provide connection points for smoke detectors, phase monitor, gas controller, economizer, thermostat, DDC control options, and high and low pressure switches. 4. Safeties: a. Compressor over-temperature, over-current. High internal pressure differential. b. Low-pressure switch. c. Freeze protection (evaporator coil). d. High-pressure switch. e. Automatic reset, motor thermal overload protector. 5. Induced draft heating section shall be provided with the following minimum protections: a. High-temperature limit switch. b. Induced--draft motor speed sensor. c. Flame rollout switch. d. Flame proving controls. 6. Operating Characteristics a. Standard unit shall be capable of starting and running at 125 F. ambient outdoor temperature per maximum load criteria of ARI Standard 210. HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800-9 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 b. Standard unit shall be capable of operating in cooling mode down to an outdoor ambient temperature of 35 F. [Note to Engineer: Alternative low ambient head pressure control for cooling operation below 35 F. is available. See Special Features section of this specification] c. Unit shall be provided with fan time delay to prevent cold air delivery in heating mode. 7. Electrical Requirements a. All unit power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single location through the unit side or bottom. 8. Motors a. Compressor motors shall be cooled by refrigerant gas passing through motor windings and shall have line break thermal and current overload protection. b. Evaporator fan motor shall have permanently lubricated, sealed bearings and inherent automatic-reset thermal overload protection. Evaporator motors are designed specifically for Carrier and do not have conventional horsepower (hp) ratings listed on the motor nameplate. Motors are designed and qualified in the air-over location downstream of the cooling coil and carry a maximum continuous BHP rating that is the maximum application BHP rating for the motor; no safety factors above that rating may be applied. c. Totally enclosed condenser-fan motor shall have permanently lubricated, sealed bearings, and inherent automatic-reset thermal overload protection. d. Induced-draft motor shall have permanently lubricated sealed bearings and inherent automatic-reset thermal overload protection. e. Special Features i. Full Perimeter Roof Curbs (Horizontal and Vertical Supply and/or Return Duct Applications): 1. Permits installing and securing ductwork to curb prior to mounting unit on the curb. Field assembly required. 2. Curb shall be rated to withstand a design earthquake in Seismic Zone 4. Calculations signed and stamped by a California licensed structural engineer shall be available from the curb manufacturer. 3. Curb shall be manufactured by Micro-Metl Corporation, M.W. Sausse, Can-Fab, Inc. or approved equal. f. Full Perimeter Spring Vibration Roof Curbs (Horizontal and Vertical Supply and/or Return Duct Applications): i. Include California approved 2-inch spring isolators. ii. Permits installing and securing ductwork to curb prior to mounting unit on the curb. Field assembly required. iii. Curb shall be rated to withstand a design earthquake in Seismic Zone 4. Calculations signed and stamped by a California licensed structural engineer shall be available from the curb manufacturer. iv. Curb shall be manufactured by Micro-Metl Corporation, M.W. Sausse, Can-Fab, Inc. or approved equal. 15800-10 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 g. Integrated Economizer: i. Integrated, gear-driven parallel modulating blade type capable of simultaneous economizer and compressor operation. Approved manufacturers shall be Carrier, Micro-Metl Corporation, or Can-Fab, Inc. ii. Independent modules for vertical or horizontal return configurations shall be available. Vertical return configurations shall be available as a factory installed option. Horizontal return configurations shall be field-installed. iii. Low-leakage (less than 2%), opposing, gear-driven dampers with UL approved gears. iv. Capable of introducing up to 100% outdoor air for minimum ventilation as well as free cooling. v. Integral barometric relief damper shall be sized equal to that of the OSA damper (100 percent relief). Package shall include damper, seals, hardware, and hoods to relieve excess internal pressure. Damper shall close due to gravity upon unit shutdown. vi. Economizer shall have CO2 sensor capability (if required) to provide demand control ventilation when used in conjunction with a wall-mounted CO2 sensor. h. Standard outdoor-air temperature sensor shall be adjustable dry-bulb type with an available range from 40 to 100 F. i. Option 1: OSA enthalpy sensor. Provides single sensor control of economizer to determine feasibility of OSA availability for free-cooling based on enthalpy. i. Stainless Steel Heat Exchanger: i. Stainless steel heat exchanger shall be of the tubular-section type, constructed of a minimum of 20 gauge type 409 stainless steel. ii. Type 409 stainless steel shall be used in heat exchanger tubes and vestibule plate. iii. SS heat exchanger warranty shall be 15 years. j. Power Exhaust (Single Speed): i. Shall include belt-drive, centrifugal-type exhaust fan with damper and single stage control. Factory assembled and designed to exhaust between 75% and 100% of the supply air. Manufacturer shall be Micro-Metl Corporation, Can-Fab, Inc., or approved equal. ii. Shall be unit-mounted on vertical configured unit, and duct mounted on horizontal configured unit. iii. Shall be field-installed by mechanical contractor. iv. Power shall be single point connection on vertical configured unit. v. Include 100% shut-down on loss of power, and barometric relief damper. k. Modulating Power Exhaust : i. Shall include VFD-driven, centrifugal-type exhaust fan with damper and modulating control. Factory assembled and designed to exhaust between 75% and 100% of the supply air. Manufacturer shall be Micro-Metl Corporation, Can-Fab, Inc., or approved equal. ii. Shall be unit-mounted on vertical configured unit, and duct mounted on horizontal configured unit. HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800-11 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 iii. Shall be field-installed by mechanical contractor. iv. Power shall be single point connection on vertical configured unit. v. Include 100% shut-down on loss of power, and barometric relief damper. vi. Include 30 feet of field-installed pressure pick-up tubing (room termination by installing contractor). l. Room Thermostat: i. Two-stage, 7-Day programmable type, with 20 holidays and continuous fan operation. Title-24 compliant with pre-occupancy purge and setback override. Includes change filter and low battery indicators. Supports multiple indoor room sensors. Retain time for up to 35 days on power failure. Model Sigler T-500 or approved equal. m. Low Ambient Control: i. Motor-Master II low ambient control (field-installed) for cooling operation down to 0 F. by cycling condenser fan to maintain saturated condensing temperature within normal operating limits. Includes temperature sensor control, field mounted on header tube of condenser coil. Required when cooling operation below 25 F. ambient is desired. n. Louvered Condenser Coil Hail Guard: o. Louvered panels to protect condenser coil from damage and vandalism. p. Copper-fin coils shall have a flexible epoxy polymer coating referred to as E-COAT. Coating shall be uniformly applied to all coil surface areas without material bridging between fins. Coating process shall ensure complete coil encapsulation. Color shall be high gloss black. Corrosion durability shall be confirmed through testing shall be no less than 1000 hours salt spray per ASTM B117-90. Coil construction shall be copper fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. 2.4 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials, or UL 181. B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 or ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having zinc coating of 1.25 oz per sq ft for each side in conformance with ASTM A90. Round duct shall be spiral seam construction. C. Flexible Ducts: Interlocking spiral of galvanized steel or aluminum construction; rated to (2 inches WG positive and 1.5 inches WG negative for low pressure ducts) (and 15 inches WG positive or negative for medium high pressure ducts.) D. Insulated Flexible Ducts: Flexible duct wrapped with flexible glass fiber insulation, enclosed by Pressure Ductwork: seamless aluminum pigmented plastic vapor barrier jacket; maximum 0.23 K value at 75 degrees F w/metal connectors. E. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. F. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic. G. Hanger Rod: Steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. H. Low Pressure Ducts: 1. Fabricate and support in accordance with 1998 CMC, SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Gages for galvanized 15800-12 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 steel ducts for low pressure systems where velocities do not exceed 2000 FPM shall be as follows: RECTANGULAR DUCT Dimension of Largest Side (L) in Inches Gage ROUND DUCT Diameter (D) In Inches L<12 26 D<9 26 12<L<30 24 9<D<14 24 30<L<54 22 14<D<23 22 54<L<84 20 23<D<37 20 84<L 18 37<D<51 18 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800-13 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING Ga. 51<D<61 16 61<D<84 14 All joint and seam constructions as indicated in the CMC are acceptable. 2. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. 3. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes. 4. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees. 5. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. I. Volume Control Dampers: 1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. 2. Opposed blade dampers shall have factory-fabricated blades, with factory assembled linkages, mounted in frames. Blades shall have interlocking edges and ends. Rectangular dampers 6" or more wide shall be the multi-blade type. Blades on multi-blade type dampers must not be over 6" wide. Dampers shall be of the opposed blade type. Dampers shall have bar or channel frames and corner bracing. All blade and linkage bearings shall be self lubricating plastic. Damper assembly leakage not to exceed 1% with 4.0 W.C. static pressure. 3. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. 4. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. J. Duct Test Holes: 1. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. K. Diffusers, Supply Registers, Return Registers, and Exhaust Grilles:

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 1. Fabricate of steel with steel or aluminum frame and baked enamel off-white finish. 2. Provide opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face as indicated on the drawings. 3. Ceiling Supply Diffusers (SD): Krueger Model 124OP or approved equal, with 4-way throw, perforated face, with balancing damper, or approved equal. 4. Exposed Round Supply Diffuser (SD): Krueger Model RA-2 concentric round or approved equal, with adjustable throw, with volume damper. No integral volume dampers for the diffusers/grilles/registers serving performance spaces. 5. Wall Supply Register (SR) and Wall or Ceiling Exhaust or Return grille (EG) or (RG): Krueger Type 88OH double deflection type and S8OH fixed bar-type or approved equal. Constructed of steel with opposed blade damper. 6. Heavy Duty Wall Return or Exhaust Register (RG) or (EG): Krueger Type 480H Heavy Duty fixed blade or approved equal. Provide opposed blade damper as required. 2.5 CONTROLS A. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper coordination of all control work and electrical work in connection therewith. He shall also be responsible for the proper operation of the entire system. B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all line voltage control wiring, and in all conduit. Wire sizing and length of run shall be coordinated with the manufacturer and Electrical Engineer. All controls, wiring, and conduit shall be by control contractor. C. Electrical Work: All electric relays, handoff automatic switches and all electrical wiring and all conduit will be provided under the Electrical Section, except as otherwise specified. Furnish and install additional conduit, wiring, relays, and handoff automatic switches made necessary by the use of approved substituted equipment under this Section with no additional cost to the Owner. D. Refer to drawings for control diagrams and additional requirements. E. Calibration of Controls: Contractor shall carefully calibrate and adjust all controls as required to maintain comfort conditions and maximum energy conservation. F. Thermostats shall be by the control contractor and shall part of a Lead/Lag system unless specified otherwise. G. Where stand-alone controls are indicated, mechanical contractor shall be responsible for low voltage controls conduit, wiring, and thermostat. 2.6 INSULATION A. General: 1. All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to the insulation) fire smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding: Flame Spread: 25 Smoke Developed: 50 2. All products or their shipping cartons shall bear a label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not exceed above requirements. Any treatment of jackets or facings to impart flame and smoke safety shall meet the above requirements. 3. The Contractor shall certify that all products used have met the above criteria. 4. The insulation values shown are a minimum. If the requirements of Title 24 exceed these values, the amount of and/or type must be increased to meet the Title 24 requirements. 15800-14 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 B. Duct Insulation: 1. Fiberglass Duct Wrap: a. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. i. 'K' value: ASTM C518, 0.48 at 75 degrees F. ii. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F. iii. Density: 0.75 lb/ ft3. b. Vapor Barrier Jacket: i. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film vinyl. ii. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.5 perm. iii. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. c. Vapor Barrier Tape: Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. d. Tile Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage. 2. Glass Fiber Duct Liner, Flexible: a. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. i. 'K' value: ASTM C518, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. ii. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F. iii. Density: 1.5 to 3.0 lb/ft3. iv. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 4,000 ft/min. b. Adhesive: Waterproof (fire-retardant) type. c. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad. 3. Glass Fiber Duct Liner, Rigid: a. Insulation: ASTM C612; semi-rigid, noncombustible. i. 'K' value: ASTM C518, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. ii. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F. iii. Density: 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu ft. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL iv. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 4,000. b. Adhesive: Waterproof (fire-retardant) type. A. Install all equipment in locations indicated on the Drawings. Contractor will be responsible to verify with the Owner, if suitability is doubted. Contractor shall notify the Owner before installation into any apparent improper locations of interference with other work such as electrical outlets, windows, cabinetwork or other features. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Roof-top equipment: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Mount units on factory built roof-mounting frame providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services, or on platforms, see details 2/M-5.1 and 31/6.1 for AC units. For roof exhaust fan and HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800-15 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 condensing unit see details 1 and 3/m-5.1. The contractor shall provide construction filters and spare filters sets and keeping ductwork clean during construction. B. Ductwork and Accessories: 1. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. 2. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. 3. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to meet the provisions of Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems, Second Edition, February, 1998. 4. Provide balancing dampers at points on low-pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. 5. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. 6. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. 7. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. 8. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to Architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. 9. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection. 10. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or register assembly. 11. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. C. Thermostats and over-ride switches: Install at 48" above finished floor unless otherwise stated. Coordinate with other trades. D. Insulation: 1. Duct Insulation: a. Unless specifically indicated on the drawings the Contractor may line or wrap ductwork to meet insulation requirements. b. Fiberglass duct wrap: i. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket. ii. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires. iii. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. iv. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. 15800-16 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 v. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping. c. Duct (and Plenum) liner Application: i. Install as indicated (sound lining) on the drawings. ii. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA Standards for spacing. Seal and smooth joints. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. iii. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for airflow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness. E. Install Spring Curb Rail vibration isolation system per manufacturer s recommendations where required. Provide shear strap (1 per side) from A/C unit to SCR-EQ, and aircraft cable from A/C unit to equipment curb per manufacturer s recommendations. Submit shop drawings for location of points of attachment, and methods and materials: 3.3 AIR SYSTEM TEST AND BALANCE A. Perform all tests to the entire satisfaction of the Owner. Air balancing contractor shall notify Owner one week prior to scheduling air balance at the site. B. Regulating and Adjusting Air Systems: 1. The Contractor shall have an experienced independent testing company certified member of the Associated Air Balance Council (A.A.B.C.) specializing in air conditioning system testing completely balance the air systems so that the volume of air indicated on the drawings is being delivered to the outlets. He shall adjust and re-adjust this part of the work until the operation complies with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. 2. Testing Procedure: Procedures shall conform to A.A.B.C. standards. Provide reports in sort cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. 3. The following test data shall be taken and three (3) copies submitted in tabulated form to the Architect for each system: a. Test and adjust all supply, return & exhaust blower RPM to design requirements. b. Test and record all motor full load amperes. c. Test and record system static pressures, suction and discharge. d. Test and adjust system for design re-circulated air, CFM. e. Test and adjust system for design CFM outside air. f. Adjust all supply, return and exhaust outlets to within 5% of design CFM. END OF SECTION HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800-17 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 SECTION 15895 HVAC EQUIPMENT & DUCT CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. General Conditions of the construction contract shall be a part of these specifications, and shall govern the HVAC Systems Rehabilitation Contractor. All work shall be done in accordance with requirements of the Owner and the construction contractor. 1. Contractor s License: The Contractor shall be licensed in the State of California. This License shall be a C-61 Specialty License in the D-64 Duct Cleaning Sub- Division. 2. National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA): The contractor shall be a Certified Member in good standing with NADCA. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall have thorough knowledge and experience in the rehabilitation and cleaning of projects of similar type, size, and degree of difficulty completed within the last two years. 1. All work shall be supervised by a foreman having thorough knowledge and experience in the cleaning of air conditioning systems. Experienced, qualified personnel shall perform the work. 2. Contractor shall be fully covered by Workmen s Compensation, Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance, and certificates of these coverage s and limits shall be provided to the Owner upon request. B. Photo Documentation: Documentation shall include the use of a 35-mm camera and a fiberoptic boroscope, where required. Contractor shall take photos of conditions before and after cleaning for inclusion in a project report to be presented to the Owner at the conclusion of the work. 1.3 LABOR AND MATERIALS A. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, supplies, tools, equipment, supervision, transportation and any other services or items necessary to accomplish the work. B. Safety Procedures and Policy: Contractor shall provide adequate and necessary management personnel to ensure that all safety policies and project requirements are met. 1. Maintain safe and healthy employee working conditions and establish safe operating procedures at each job site. 2. Comply with the safety standards of all federal and state regulatory agencies as a minimum requirement for safety performance at each job site. 3. Comply with all of the safety requirements of the job site and safety requirements mandated by the owner. HVAC EQUIPMENT & DUCT CLEANING 15895-1 15895 HVAC EQUIPMENT & DUCT CLEANING 121112

4. Contractor shall provide all necessary safety devices and personal protective equipment for employee use, and shall require their use when needed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Material Safety Data sheets for all materials and products used by Contractor shall be provided to Owner prior to start-up of cleaning operations. B. Degreaser: Maintex 7-11 Armex Baking Soda Blasting Crystals or equal as approved by Owner. C. Sanitizer Oxine BBJ Microblocide or other EPA registered equal as approved by Owner. D. Re-Surfacing Treatments: Schuller Superseal Edgecoat Fosters 40-20 Vac-Systems Tough Coat Porta Sept by Porter Paints, containing EPA registered anti-microbial Swamp Cooler Repair condensate drain pan sealant or other EPA registered equal as approved by Owner. E. Paint: Styletone Series 8 19 Machinery Grey Zynolite Spray Paint. F. Insulating Lining Material: To match existing or Certainteed Tough Gard Certainteed Ultra-Lite Armaflex Astro-Foil or equal as approved by Owner. G. Adhesives: Armstrong 520 DPIO/20 Super 77 Spray Adhesive or equal as approved by Owner. H. Duct Sealant: DP 10/10 Top 12000 Silicone Sealant or equal as approved by Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 METHODOLOGY A. Duct Liner Adhesive: Shall be NFPA 225 and ANSI/NFPA 90A Class I rated for a maximum of 25 flame spread test, and 50 for smoke development. Wet flammability shall conform to ASTM D93. Water vapor performance of sealers and coatings shall conform to ASTM E96 with a maximum of 9 Perms. B. Air Intake Screens, Fresh Air Louvers and Return Air Louvers: Shall be wire brushed, vacuumed and washed using a solution non-caustic to the painted surfaces. C. Automatic and Manual Dampers: Shall be inspected and tested to ensure freedom of action. Any mechanical defects will be reported to owner for correction. All manual dampers shall be marked and reset in the exact position as found at the commencement of the project. D. Supply Grilles, Return Grilles, Exhaust Grilles: Shall be removed and washed using a solution non-caustic to the finished surfaces. E. Temporary Filters: Shall be placed behind all supplies grilles to trap any contaminants that might be discharged during the cleaning operation. The temporary filters will remain in place approximately two weeks after completion date, and then removed. F. Supply Ducts, Return Ducts, and Exhaust Ducts: Shall be vacuumed in their entirety. All interior insulated ducts shall be vacuumed, and the insulation inspected for any physical damage. Any damage found will be reported to Owner for corrective action. 1. Access Panels: All ducts too small to allow direct entrance shall have access openings installed approximately every 10-15 feet as required, and at each elbow and vertical riser. Each access opening shall be recovered with a panel 15895-2 HVAC EQUIPMENT & DUCT CLEANING 15895 HVAC EQUIPMENT & DUCT CLEANING 121112

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 made of the same gauge metal, and installed in such a manner as to insure an air tight job. All sheet metal duct work shall be in accordance with SMACNA Standards, G. Ceiling Access: Where required, shall be provided by general contractor. H. Filter Frames: shall be cleaned by wire brushing and vacuuming prior to washing using a solution non-caustic to the finished surfaces. Where minor damage is discovered, the frames shall be repaired by straightening. Any major damage will be reported to Owner for corrective action. I. Filters: shall be replaced by contractor after cleaning procedures. J. Contractor shall keep the job site clean of all surplus materials and debris. Dispose of all debris and leave area swept clean at the end of each work shift. END OF SECTION HVAC EQUIPMENT & DUCT CLEANING 15895-3 15895 HVAC EQUIPMENT & DUCT CLEANING 121112

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION 15900 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Provide all work for the complete installation of automatic temperature controls. A. Work in this Section: Principal items include: 1. Electronic and electric controls, includes sensors, switches, relays, control panels for instruments. 2. Electric motors for air dampers, valves, etc. 3. Local control panels. 4. Adjustment and validation of control system. Instruction of Owner's representative on maintenance and operation of control equipment. 5. Electric diagrams showing interlocks between equipment furnished under the other sections and control furnished herein. 6. Direct digital control for systems. 7. Wiring and Conduit: low voltage wire and low voltage conduit for the control system under Division 15, all required power wiring, high voltage wire and high voltage conduit under Division 16. 1.3 SYSTEM A. The Temperature Control System shall be installed as a installed project and shall consist of all sensors, actuators, direct digital controllers, supervisory controller, electrical low voltage (24 VAC) and line voltage control wiring for a complete and operating installation as specified herein. The system shall be a standard product with the manufacturer who will guarantee ongoing parts availability and factory trained field support for five (5) years after system acceptance. 1.4 RELATED SECTIONS A. Refer to Division 9 for patching and painting required for the control system installation. Not work of this section. B. Automatic dampers in ductwork, casings, etc. furnished and installed by the Mechanical Division under control people's supervision. The dampers shall be correctly installed so that they operate freely and close tightly. Provide and install blank off plates when the control application requires dampers smaller than duct size. C. Refer to Division-16 sections for the following work; not work of this section: 1. Power supply wiring for power source to power connection on controls and/or unit control panels, including starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer. VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM 15900 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1. General: The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent applicable: 1.6 SUBMITTALS ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, Latest Edition. EIA - Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage Digital Interface Circuits; RS-485. NEMA - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum); 250-1979 NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; 1981 NFPA 90A - Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems; 1981 A. Submit installation drawings, sequences of operation and catalog cut sheets for each device of the proposed system prior to installation for engineer's approval. The drawings shall include the location and intercommunication of all stand-alone and subordinate control panels; the schematic diagrams, of the controlled equipment with sensors and actuators shown interconnected to the system controllers; and logic diagrams that depict the sequence of operation. B. After completion of the installation and commissioning of the system including final adjustments, a full set of as-built documentation shall be turned over to the Owner. The as-builts shall include one (1) set of reproducible drawings and two (2) copies of the database on flexible or removable hard disk for each stand-alone controller and the supervisory computer. 1. As-built documentation shall include diagrammatic layouts of the automatic control systems specified herein. Layouts shall show all control equipment, and the function of each item shall be indicated for the different seasons, Layouts shall be located in plastic protective folder and placed in the control panels. 2. All Drawings shall be accompanied with a complete description of sequence of operation. Each control element mentioned in the sequence description shall be identified with the same mark as shown- on the control diagram. C. Submittal of Materials: 1. Material submittals shall be manufacturers prepared catalog cuts indicating type, size and technical details. 2. Reference catalog cuts to the applicable specification article (e.g. 2.02A). 3. Catalog cuts shall be submitted in complete groups of manufacturer's material. 4. Partial submittals of groups or systems are not acceptable. 5. Verify that the submittal has been reviewed in detail and is in fact the Contractor's choice of materials. D. Upon receipt of contract and prior to the delivery of parts, submit eight copies of the following drawings: 1. Submit eight copies of schematic drawings showing the respective locations of components, as applicable and interconnecting wiring between all devices. Also all field terminal and sensing devices. Also all field terminal and sensing devices shall be listed by function and point number and shall display interconnecting wiring and terminals of controlled systems and devices. 15900-2 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM 15900 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 E. Submit eight copies of schematic drawings showing electric connection details for actuators, transducers, and other electric components. All connections shall be labeled to coordinate with the description of operation, including descriptions to indicate action of components, normal positions, spring ranges, etc. 1.7 MANUFACTURERS A. Carrier CCN. No substitutions will be accepted. B. Controls installation will be by Russell Sigler, Inc. Controls Group. No exceptions. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide all labor, material and equipment necessary to maintain beneficial performance of the entire Building Automation System for a period of one (1) year after acceptance of the system, or parts thereof, by an authorized representative of the Owner. Any defects in workmanship or material during the warranty period shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor at no charge to the Owner. All work shall be accomplished during normal working hours, Monday through Friday excluding legal holidays. Precaution shall be taken to minimize disruption of facility operations. B. A prepaid Warranty Service Agreement shall be turned over to the Owner at the time of the acceptance test as a prerequisite of system acceptance. The contract shall include the terms and conditions stated herein. C. Service work shall be performed by service personnel in the direct employ of the control contractors. The service technicians shall be factory trained and certified by the manufacturer to be competent in all aspects of the installed system. The technician shall have a working knowledge of calibration techniques, preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, software diagnostics and microprocessor repair. D. Provide preventive maintenance at one (1) month intervals such that one twelfth of the system is tested and re-commissioned if necessary at each monthly inspection. An Owner's representative shall certify that the monthly test has been conducted and the control system is functioning properly. A log of tasks performed at each test shall be maintained by the controls contractor and signed by the Owner as evidence of satisfactory completion of the Warranty Service Agreement. The log shall be retained on site and available for review by authorized personnel. E. System modifications shall be incorporated into the as-built documentation and/or operators and maintenance manuals when operating parameters, control point settings or control strategies are changed. System modifications made by the user of the controls contractor shall have both parties' approvals in order to maintain the Warranty Service Agreement. All database changes shall be saved on disk for backup to the system. F. Software upgrade program shall be implemented on the anniversary or anniversaries of the warranty period. The upgrade shall provide all enhancements offered by the manufacturer for programs in the accepted systems. G. System enhancements beyond the scope of the project shall be field upgradable with pull out/plug-in ease. Provided at reasonable value added cost these upgrades may be purchased at the Owner's option. VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM 15900 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIELD INSTALLED SENSORS A. Space Temperature Sensors 1. Space Temperature Sensors shall be 5,000 or 10,000 ohm thermistor with wall plate adapter and blank cover assembly. The sensor shall include an integral occupancy override button and LCD. Space Temperature Sensors shall include space temperature adjustment slides where shown on the plans. The Space Temperature Sensors shall be mounted approximately 48" above the floor. B. Duct Temperature Sensors 1. Duct Temperature Sensors shall be 1000 ohm averaging RTD's, 5,000 or 10,000 ohm thermistors. 2.2 UNITARY CONTROLLER A. System Description 1. System consists of a constant volume rooftop unit with gas heat. 2. System consists of a constant volume fan coil unit. B. General 1. Each rooftop unit shall be equipped with an EMS compatible communicating microprocessor controller (RTUC). C. Occupied Mode 1. The RTUC shall be indexed to occupied by any of the following events: a. The RTUCs remote occupancy point has closed and there is no Linkage. b. The RTUCs internal occupancy schedule indicates the occupied mode (if no Linkage). c. An Unoccupied Timed Override has been initiated. d. A timed override may be initiated by the operator from central network software, or by a zone occupant pushing the override button on the space sensor. A Timed override shall extend the occupied schedule from 1 to 4 hours (user adjustable). D. Indoor Fan Operation 1. When indexed to occupied, The RTUC shall start and run the indoor fan continuously. When the RTUC has been indexed to unoccupied, the RTUC shall stop the indoor fan. The fan shall be restarted and run during the unoccupied mode if: a. The zone space temperature drifts outside the unoccupied setpoints. b. Unoccupied Free Cooling is active. c. The IAQ pre-occupancy purge cycle is active. d. A timed override request has been initiated. E. Occupied Cooling 15900-4 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM 15900 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 1. Occupied cooling shall be established if The RTUC is indexed to occupied, and the zone space temperature is above the zone occupied cooling setpoint of 74 0 F (adjustable). F. Economize 1. With the indoor fan running, The RTUC shall open the outdoor air dampers to the minimum ventilation flow rate of 20% (adjustable). If the indoor fan has run for at least 30 seconds, the outdoor air temperature is less than the space temperature, and the outdoor air is qualified for cooling, the RTUC shall activate the economizer as the first stage of cooling. The RTUC shall modulate the outside air dampers to bring the space temperature to the occupied cooling setpoint. G. DX staging 1. If economizer cooling capacity is inadequate, and the outdoor air temperature is above the DX cooling lockout temperature of (45 0 F adjustable), the RTUC shall stage DX cooling as required to bring the space temperature to the occupied cooling setpoint. Minimum on and off timers shall protect the unit from short cycling. As the cooling load decreases, the DX cooling stages shall be disabled while the indoor fan continues to run. H. Occupied Heating 1. Occupied heating shall be established if the RTUC is indexed to occupied, and the zone space temperature is below the zone occupied heating setpoint of 69 0 F (adjustable). With the indoor fan running, the RTUC shall close the outdoor dampers to the minimum ventilation flow rate of 20% (adjustable). If the indoor fan is running, the RTUC shall stage the electric heat as required to bring the space temperature to setpoint. Minimum on and off timers shall protect the unit from short cycling. As the heating load decreases, the heat stages shall be disabled and the indoor fan will continue to run. I. Unoccupied Mode 1. When the occupied mode ends, the RTUC shall be indexed to unoccupied, and the following control routines may become active if the proper conditions exist: J. IAQ Pre-Occupancy Purge 1. If the RTUC is indexed to unoccupied and the time is within 2 hours of the next occupied period, and, the OAT is less that the occupied cool setpoint (OCSP) and less than 50 (adjustable), the RTUC shall start the indoor fan and open the damper to 100%. If the OAT is above the OCSP then the damper will be positioned to 35% (adjustable). If the OAT is less than 50 (adjustable) then the damper will positioned to 10% (adjustable). The fan shall run for minimum of 5 minutes (adjustable) at which time the fan will return to unoccupied temperature control and the damper will close K. Unoccupied Free Cooling 1. If the RTUC is indexed to unoccupied, no other unoccupied mode of operation is active, the space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 75 0 F (adjustable), and the outdoor air conditions are qualified for cooling, the RTUC shall activate unoccupied free VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM 15900 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 cooling. In this mode, the RTUC shall fully open the outside air dampers, start the indoor fan, and cool the space below the unoccupied space temperature setpoint. When the space setpoint has been satisfied, the RTUC shall stop the fan and close the outdoor air dampers. L. Unoccupied Cooling Mode 1. If the RTUC is indexed to unoccupied, no other unoccupied mode of operation is active, and the space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 76 0 F (adjustable), the RTUC shall activate the unoccupied cooling operating mode. In this mode, the RTUC shall stage cooling to bring the space to the unoccupied cooling setpoint. When the space setpoint has been satisfied, the RTUC shall stop the fan. M. Unoccupied Heating Mode 1. If the RTUC is indexed to unoccupied, no other unoccupied mode of operation is active, and the space temperature is below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 69 0 F (adjustable), the RTUC shall activate the unoccupied heating operating mode. In this mode, the RTUC shall stage electric heat to bring the space to the unoccupied heating setpoint. When the space setpoint has been satisfied, the RTUC shall stop the fan. N. Temperature Compensated Start 1. If the RTUC is indexed to unoccupied it shall be able to calculate an early start bias time (SBT) that will be subtracted from the occupied start time based on space temperature deviation from occupied set points. This will allow the RTUC to start at the latest possible time and allow the space temp to reach occupied setpoint by the beginning of the occupied time. O. Room Sensor 1. If equipped with a space sensor with a slide-bar, the zone occupant shall be able to manually adjust the space cooling and heating temperature setpoints by 0 0 F to 15 0 F (adjustable). If the sensor is equipped with an override button, the occupant shall be able to initiate a timed override from 1 to 4 hours (adjustable). 2.3 3V VVT SYSTEM CONTROLLERS A. The VVT Comfort System shall consist of a complete array of input and output devices. The VVT Comfort System shall be a stand-alone system. B. The control system shall be available as a complete package with the required input Sensors and devices readily available. The system shall be capable of providing complete control of HVAC functions; variable air zone control, bypass air control in pressure dependent applications. Airside Controls shall be capable of operating VVT Comfort System dampers as well as VAV terminal boxes without supplemental heat sources at the zone. All temperature sensors shall be capable of being read and displayed in.1 F increments. All controllers shall have an on board LCD display capable of displaying the following sensor and input information applicable to the controller in degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius: 1. VVT Controller: - Space Temperature - Supply Air Temperature - System Indoor Air Quality Condition - Outside Air Temperature 15900-6 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM 15900 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 2. Zone Controller: - Space Temperature - Zone Supply Air Temperature 3. Bypass Controller: - System Indoor Air Quality Condition - Space Temperature (display only) C. All applicable sensors shall be accessed for calibration at the controller display. D. The VVT system shall have system mode switches (Cool, Heat and Fan) on the monitor controller for selecting the mode of control. These switches can be used directly or overridden through configuration. The system fan shall be capable of operating in a continuous or automatic mode during occupied hours and in an automatic mode during unoccupied hours. E. The VVT Monitor controller shall be capable of providing a communication check of all associated controls and display device type as well as error conditions. F. The system shall be fully automatic. All control functions shall be able to be performed without operator intervention. G. The construction of the equipment, both physically and electronically, shall be modular in nature. H. Controller Relay Interface 1. The relay board shall interface with the unitary controller to provide staging control of heating and cooling and to provide sensor information to the controller. The relay board shall maintain constant data retrieval from the unitary controller without interruption. If interruption occurs, the relay board shall reset the controller to protect the system and place the unitary controller in a safe state. I. Memory and Time Clock 1. The system shall not require the use of batteries for any data storage. The Zone Controller shall have a Non-Volatile Memory with indefinite storage of configuration data. The VVT system shall have an on board 365-day time clock with built in daylight savings time and leap year adjustment. In the event of power failure, the time clock shall be backed up for a minimum of 10 hours. The VVT system shall be capable of sharing time information with other VVT Comfort System controls. J. Setpoints 1. The VVT system and Zone Controller shall utilize and store the following setpoints: - Occupied Heating Setpoint - Occupied Cooling Setpoint - Unoccupied Heating Setpoint - Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint - Cooling Setpoint Low Limit - Heating Setpoint High Limit VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM 15900 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 2. The Monitor shall utilize and store these additional Setpoints: - Leaving Air High/Low Temperature Limits - Heat Mode Error Setpoint - Cool Mode Error Setpoint - Heating OAT Lockout Setpoint - Cooling OAT Lockout Setpoint0 3. Bypass Controllers shall utilize and store these Setpoints: - System Pressure Setpoint - Cool down Setpoint - Warm up Setpoint 4. All Setpoints shall be capable of being modified at the controller display or through Carrier Comfort Network software. K. Scheduling 1. The system shall be capable of operating in an occupied or unoccupied mode with Up to 8 period changes per day. All Zone Controllers shall have the capability to follow independent schedules or receive the schedule from other VVT Comfort System products as well as all Carrier Comfort Network Modules existing on the Carrier communication bus with scheduling capabilities. All schedules shall be adjustable in one-minute increments. 2. The VVT system shall be capable of utilizing up to 18 holiday schedules with up to 99 days per schedule for overriding the occupancy schedule. 3. The VVT Zone Controller shall have built-in override capabilities for Unoccupied schedule override from 0 to 4 hours in 10-minute increments. L. Security Level 1. The VVT System shall have four levels of security for access of control tasks and decisions with level one providing full access and level four providing zero access from the controller display. Levels two and three provide limited access. M. HVAC Equipment Protection 1. The VVT Monitor Controller shall be capable of monitoring the leaving air temperature as a safety device to limit the HVAC unit in both the heating and cooling modes. It shall have the capability to shut down stages based on a rise or fall in leaving air temperature above or below the configurable high and low safety limits. 2. The system shall provide protection from the HVAC unit being intermittently cycled. 3. From heating to cooling or vice versa by utilizing time guard and minimum run time Configurations. N. Energy Conservation 1. The system shall incorporate the following features for the provision of energy Conservation: 15900-8 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM 15900 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 a. Optimized Staging shall allow the VVT system to monitor space temp demands and delay second stage of heating or cooling, if demands are being satisfied with single stage equipment. b. The locking out of mechanical heating or cooling modes based on configurable outside air temperature limits. c. The system shall intelligently start all equipment in a stagger start manner after a transition from unoccupied to occupied modes as well as power failure to reduce High peak power consumption on start up. d. VVT controllers shall have the capability of being overridden by DDC controls existing on the Carrier Comfort Network communication bus with demand limiting functions to reduce overall energy consumption and control on and off peak time kw usage. O. Stand Alone Capability 1. The VVT Comfort System shall be capable of providing all control functions of the HVAC system without the use of a computer. All configuration selections shall be capable of being performed at the controller s display via push button access. P. VVT System 1. The VVT system shall be capable of controlling space demand in a variable volume application by monitoring space temperature and determining the heating or cooling demand. The space temperatures shall be controlled to maintain individual heating and cooling Setpoints. The system fan shall be capable of operating in a continuous or automatic mode during occupied hours and in an automatic mode during unoccupied hours. Q. VVT Zone Controller 1. The Zone Controller shall have an independent, programmable ventilation damper position capable of providing ventilation to the zone at all times. The ventilation operation shall have the ability to terminate if supply air temperature is out of bounds of set limits. 2. The Zone Controller shall have the capability to configure minimum and maximum damper positions. 2.4 3V VVT SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Occupied Mode 1. Fan Operation: a. If the Fan mode is configured to ON, the system fan will operate continuously. If the Fan mode is configured to AUTO, the fan will start with a call for first stage cooling or heating and continue to operate for 90 seconds after the mode has been satisfied. 2. Cooling Operation Staging Control: VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM 15900 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 a. The system will scan all associated zones to collect system temperature demand data. Total number of zones with cooling will determine system mode demands 1.5 F. above the zone(s) cooling setpoint. If the total number of zones requesting heat outnumber cooling demand zones, the system will request a system heating mode and all zones desiring cooling will remain in a stand-alone mode. All cooling zones will go closed, to minimum position or to supplemental heat position during system heating mode. With a system cooling demand greater than heat, the system will energize the first stage of cooling. All zones desiring cooling will modulate their zone dampers open, corresponding to their space temperature demand. Upon a further rise in space temp of 2.0 F or greater than the cooling Setpoint of the reference zone, the system shall execute a call for second stage cooling. If conditions are being satisfied with first stage only based on the Optimized Staging conclusion, if so configured, second stage will be delayed until conditions are no longer being maintained by first stage. Upon a decline in demand to 1.0 F of the reference zone Setpoint, 2nd stage cooling will be released. Upon a further decline in demand to.4 F of setpoint of the reference zone, first stage cooling will be released. The reference zone is determined by the largest demand for the cooling mode. The reference zone shall be re-evaluated during the system-cooling mode until all zones have satisfied their cooling demands. The system shall be capable of re-evaluating the system cooling mode, switching to a system heating mode, based on a configurable system mode re-select time value from 0 to 480 minutes when space temperature demand is greater for heating. 3. Heating Operation Staging Control: a. The system will scan all associated zones to collect system temperature demand data. Total number of zones with heating will determine system mode demands 1.5 F. below the zone(s) heating Setpoint. If the total number of zones requesting cooling outnumber heating demand zones, the Monitor will request a system cooling mode and all zones desiring heating will remain in a stand-alone mode. All heating zones will go closed, to minimum position or supplemental heat position during system cooling mode. With a system heating demand greater than cool, the Monitor will energize the first stage of heating. All zones desiring heating will modulate their zone damper to maintain space temperature demand. Upon a further fall in space temperature 2.0 F below the heating Setpoint of the reference zone, the Monitor shall execute a call for second stage cooling. If conditions are being satisfied with first stage only based on the Optimized Staging conclusion, second stage will be delayed until conditions are no longer being maintained by first stage. Upon a decline in demand to 1.0 F of the reference zone Setpoint, second stage heating will be released. Upon a further decline in demand to.4 F of setpoint of the reference zone first stage heating will be released. The reference zone is determined by the largest demand for the heating mode. The reference zone shall be re-evaluated during the system-heating mode until all zones have satisfied their heating demands. The Monitor shall be capable of re-evaluating the system heating mode, switching to a system cooling mode, based on a configurable system mode re-select time value from 0 to 480 minutes when zone temperature demand is greater for cooling. Supplemental heat shall be capable at the zone level during a system-heating mode. B. Unoccupied Mode 1. Fan Operation: a. If the fan mode is configured to ON or AUTO the system fan will be brought on with first stage cooling or heating when the VVT Comfort System is in the unoccupied mode. The system fan will be released when the system demand has been satisfied. 15900-10 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM 15900 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 2. Cooling Operation Staging Control Heating Operation Staging Control a. All control of HVAC equipment will follow the same operation as in the occupied mode with the exception of the VVT Comfort System controllers utilizing the unoccupied Setpoints instead of the occupied Setpoints. 2.05 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS A. Diagnostics 1. All VVT Comfort System controllers shall provide self-test, on board diagnostics and error code display. All VVT Comfort System controllers shall be capable of performing diagnostics on their critical components as well as all hard-wired sensors and inputs. All VVT Comfort System controllers shall send an alarm notice to stand alone web server interface until the error has been corrected or the error code display has been configured off. All VVT Comfort System controllers shall store the last five errors for diagnostic Monitoring. 2.06 EXECUTION GENERAL i. All system components and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and requirements. All necessary interconnections, services and adjustments required for a complete and operable system, shall be provided by this contractor who shall be a Carrier certified installer of the systems herein. INSTALLATION i. GENERAL 1. Electric Wiring: This contractor is responsible for all electrical installation and wiring for a fully operational Building Control System as shown on the drawings and shall include all items not shown on the electrical plans or required as per the electrical specifications. Perform all electrical installation in accordance with local and national electrical codes. Provide conduit in walls for thermostat locations and in all exposed areas. Plenum wire may be used in ceilings where anchored support is provided every 10 feet. 2. All low voltage conduit installed under this section must be in accordance with Division 16. 3. Provide shields as required by equipment manufacturer. PERMITS AND FEES i. This contractor shall secure and pay for all necessary permits, licenses and inspections as required by federal, state or local law. This includes providing required notices, plans, licenses, and fees, obtaining any necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction, and delivering any certificates of inspection as may be required. No work is to proceed until all proper certificates and licenses are obtained and posted. VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM 15900 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM

OXNARD SCHOOL DISTRICT 12/11/12 CLEAN-UP i. This contractor shall clean up regularly in order to maintain clean site conditions. In general, clean-up programs shall be scheduled by contractor at least once per week; however, the contractor shall clean up more often if required to meet OSHA standards. ii. This contractor is responsible for coordinating the work with other trades so as to eliminate unnecessary cutting and patching. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION i. Space Thermostat and Sensor Locations: In general, locate thermostats and sensors for room control immediately inside door, next to light switch at approximately 48 inches from floor. Coordinate thermostat locations with General Contractor and approval by Engineer. ii. Local Control Panels: Mount all local control panels as indicated on the control drawings. CUTTING AND PATCHING i. This contractor is responsible for coordinating the work with other trades so as to eliminate unnecessary cutting and patching. OWNER TRAINING i. Training to include. 1. Explanation of drawings and diagrams. 2. Walk-thru of jobsite to locate control components 3. Overview of operation and maintenance features. a. System Pilot front end operation. ii. Manufacturer will operate a free 40 hour a week customer support hotline for additional user support services that are required. END OF SECTION 15900-12 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM 15900 VVT ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. This specification shall apply to all phases of Work hereinafter specified, shown on Drawings, or as required to provide a complete installation of electrical systems for this Project. Work required under this specification, is not limited to just the Electrical Drawings - refer to Architectural, Structural, Landscape, and Mechanical / Plumbing Drawings, as well as all other drawings applicable to this project, which designate the scope of work to be accomplished. The intent of the Drawings and Specifications is to provide a complete and operable electrical system that includes all documents that are a part of the Contract. 1. Work Included. Furnish labor, material, services and skilled supervision necessary for the construction, erection, installation, connections, testing, and adjustment of all circuits and electrical equipment specified herein, or shown or noted on Drawings, and its delivery to the Owner complete in all respects ready for use. 2. The electrical Work includes installation or connection of certain materials and equipment furnished by others. Verify installation details, installation and rough-in locations from the actual equipment or from the equipment shop drawings. B. Electrical Drawings. Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic, and are intended to convey the scope of work, indicating intended general arrangement of equipment, conduit and outlets. Follow Drawings in laying out Work and verify spaces for installation of materials and equipment based on actual dimensions of equipment furnished. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and materials furnished under requirements of these specifications shall conform to latest publications or standard rules of the following: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers - IEEE National Electrical Manufacturers' Association - NEMA Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. - UL National Fire Protection Association - NFPA Federal Specifications - Fed. Spec. American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM American National Standards Institute - ANSI National Electrical Code - NEC National Electrical Safety Code - NESC Insulated Cable Engineers Association - ICEA American Institute of Steel Construction - AISC State and Municipal Codes In Force In The Specific Project Area Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Electronics Industries Association/ Telecommunications Industry Association (EIA/TIA) California Electrical Code (where adopted) Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) Published Electrical Standards and Codes GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-1 16010 - Electrical 121112

B. Perform Work in accordance with the National Electrical Code, applicable building ordinances, and other applicable codes, hereinafter referred to as the "Code." The Contractor shall comply with the Code including local amendments and interpretations without added cost to the Owner. Where Contract Documents exceed minimum requirements, the Contract Documents take precedence. Where code conflicts occur, the most stringent shall apply unless variance is approved. 1. Comply with all requirements for permits, licenses, fees and codes. The Contractor, at Contractor s expense, shall obtain all permits, licenses, fees, special service costs, inspections and arrangements required for Work under this contract, unless otherwise specified. 2. Comply with requirements of the applicable utility companies serving this Project. Make all arrangements with utility companies for proper coordination of Work. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Guarantee: Furnish a written guarantee for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance. B. Wherever a discrepancy in quantity or size of conduit, wire, equipment, devices, circuit breakers, etc., (all materials), arises on the Drawing and/or Specifications, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing all material and services required by the strictest condition noted on Drawings and/or in Specifications to ensure complete and operable systems as required by the Owner and Engineer. C. All Core Cutting, Drilling, and Patching: 1. For the installation of work under this Section, the aforementioned shall be performed under this Section of the Specifications and the Concrete section of the Specifications. 2. No holes will be allowed in any structural members without the written approval of the Project s Structural Engineer. 3. For penetrations of concrete slabs or concrete footings, the work shall be as directed in the Concrete Section of Specifications. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for patching and repairing surfaces where he is required to penetrate for work under this contract. 5. Penetrations shall be sealed to meet the rated integrity of the surface required to be patched and repaired. The patched surface shall be painted or finished to match the existing surface. D. Verifying Drawings and Job Conditions: 1. This Contractor shall examine all Drawings and Specifications in a manner to be fully cognizant of all work required under this Section. 2. This Contractor shall visit the site and verify existing conditions. Where existing conditions differ from Drawings, adjustment(s) shall be made and allowances included for all necessary equipment to complete all parts of the Drawings and Specifications. 16010-2 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - Electrical 121112

1.4 WORK IN COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Examine the Drawings and Specifications and determine the work to be performed by the electrical, mechanical and other trades. Provide the type and amount of electrical materials and equipment necessary to place this work in proper operation, completely wired, tested and ready for use. This shall include all conduit, wire, disconnects, relays, and other devices for the required operation sequence of all electrical, mechanical and other systems or equipment. B. Provide a conduit only system for low voltage wiring required for control of mechanical and plumbing equipment described in this or other parts of the Contract Documents. Install all control housings, conduits and backboxes required for installing conductors and wire to the controls. C. Install separate conduits between each heating, ventilating and air conditioning sensing device and its control panel and/or control motor. Before installing any conduit for heating, ventilating and air conditioning control wiring, verify the exact requirements from the control diagrams provided with the equipment manufacturer's shop drawings. 1.5 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT A. Upon completion of all electrical work, this Contractor shall test all circuits, switches, light fixtures, lighting control & dimming systems including distributed systems, UPSs, Generators, TVSSs, Lighting inverters, Transfer Switches, motors, circuit breakers, motor starters and their auxiliary circuits and any other electrical items to ensure perfect operation of all electrical equipment. B. Equipment and parts in need of correction and discovered during such testing, shall be immediately repaired or replaced with all new equipment and that part of the system shall then be retested. All such replacement or repair shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner. C. All circuit(s) shall be tested for continuity and circuit integrity. Adjustments shall be made for circuits not complying with testing criteria. D. All test reports, including copies of any required Energy Code Acceptance Forms (e.g. CA Title 24 Acceptance for Code Compliance Forms) should be submitted to the Engineer at completion of project. 1.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplates shall be provided for unit substations, switchgear, switchboards, distribution boards, distribution panels, panel boards, motor control centers, transformers, transfer switches, contactors, starters, disconnect switches, enclosed circuit breakers/switches, Inverters, UPSs, PDUs, RDCs, Lighting Control Panels, Dimming Panels, Door Releasing System Panels, Fire Alarm / Central Monitoring terminal cabinets/power supplies/control panels, and all low voltage system terminal & control cabinets. Nameplate inscriptions shall be identical to the equipment designations indicated in plans and specifications. All circuit breakers/fuses in switchgear, switchboards, distribution boards, distribution panels, UPS output circuit breakers, PDU output circuit breakers and motor control centers shall have individual nameplates located immediately adjacent to the respective device. Nameplate inscription shall identify the downstream equipment or device served by the circuit breaker or fuse. Nameplates for contactors, starters, disconnect switches, and enclosed circuit breakers shall be engraved with the device designation/identification on the top line, source identification for the device GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-3 16010 - Electrical 121112

on the 2nd line and load designation for the device on the bottom line. Where device designation is not indicated on plans/specifications, Contractor shall submit a written clarification request to the Engineer. B. Identification nameplates, UON, shall be laminated 1/8" thick micarta with beveled edges and engraved white letters 3/8" high, minimum, on 1-1/2" high black background for single line of text. Where two lines of text are required, provide min. 2" high nameplate. Where three lines of text are required, provide min. 2.5" high nameplate. C. Identification nameplates for new switchgear, switchboards, distribution boards, distribution panels, panel boards & motor control centers shall be attached with switchgear manufacturer-provided screws via switchgear manufacturer factory pre-drilled holes. A factory option to rivet identification nameplates to the equipment is only acceptable if screw-fastened nameplates are not an available option from the switchgear manufacturer. Field drilling or other mechanical attachment methods that change/void the NEMA or NTRL rating of the enclosure are strictly forbidden. D. Identification nameplates for transformers, transfer switches, disconnect switches, enclosed circuit breakers/switches, Inverters, UPSs, PDUs, RDCs, Lighting Control Panels, Dimming Panels, Door Releasing System Panels, Terminal cabinets and all circuit breakers/fuses in switchgear, switchboards, distribution boards, distribution panels, UPS output circuit breakers, PDUs, PDU output circuit breakers, and motor control centers shall be attached to the equipment by selfadhesive backing integral to the nameplates. When equipment is located outdoors, provide nameplates without self-adhesive backing and attach to equipment using weather-rated, UVresistant epoxy. In all cases, clean surfaces before applying identification nameplates parallel to equipment lines. E. Warning Placards, as required by General Single Line Diagram Notes for multiple power sources, or Instruction Placards, as required for all kirk-key interlock schemes, all UPS bypass procedures or as required elsewhere in the plans/specifications shall be self-adhesive, 1/8" thick micarta with beveled edges, engraved 1/2" high white lettering on a Red background. Warning/Instruction Placards shall be attached to the face of the equipment directly related to the placards. Provide a formal placard submittal for review by the Engineer prior to ordering any Warning/Instruction Placards. In all cases, clean surfaces before applying Warning/Instruction Placards parallel to equipment lines. F. Receptacles that are part of a UL-listed under floor computer room whip assembly, ceiling and/or cable/ladder tray-mounted receptacles used in lab, manufacturing, commercial kitchen environments or that are serving telcom/data/av racks & cabinets shall have identification nameplates located on the wiring device plate cover. Nameplates shall be self-adhesive, 1/8" thick micarta with beveled edges, engraved 1/4" high white lettering on black background with serving power source, circuit identification and NEMA/IEC receptacle type. Use of two (2) separate nameplates per device plate cover is acceptable. Affix nameplates to be visible when plugs are occupying receptacles. G. See wiring device section of this specification for additional wiring device plate cover labeling requirements. H. See drawings for panel board schedule directory installation requirements. I. See conduit installation section of this specification for conduit labeling requirements. 1.7 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. After all requirements of the Specifications and/or the Drawings have been fully completed, 16010-4 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - Electrical 121112

representatives of the Owner will inspect the work. Contractor shall provide competent personnel to demonstrate the operation of any item or system to the full satisfaction of each representative. B. Final acceptance of the work will be made by the Owner after receipt of approval and recommendation of acceptance from each representative. 1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Drawings of Record: The Contractor shall provide and keep up-to-date, a complete record set of drawings. These shall be corrected daily and show every change from the original Drawings. This set of prints shall be kept on the job site and shall be used only as a record set. This shall not be construed as authorization for the Contractor to make changes in the layout without definite instruction in each case. Upon completion of the work, a set of reproducible Contract Drawings shall be obtained from the General Contractor and all changes as noted on the record set of prints shall be incorporated thereon with black ink in a neat, legible, understandable and professional manner. Refer to the Supplementary General Conditions for complete requirements. 1.9 APPROVALS, EQUALS, SUBSTITUTIONS, ALTERNATIVES, NO KNOWN EQUAL A. Approvals: Where the words (or similar terms) approved, approval, acceptable, and acceptance are used, it shall be understood that acceptance by the Owner, Architect and Engineer are required. B. Equal: Where the words (or similar terms) equal, approved equal, equal to, or equal by, or equal and equivalent are used, it shall be understood that these words are followed by the expression in the opinion of the Owner, Architect, and Engineer. For the purposes of specifying products, the above words shall indicate the same size, made of the same construction materials, manufactured with equivalent life expectancy, having the same aesthetic appearance / style (includes craftsmanship, physical attributes, color and finish), and the same performance. C. Substitution: For the purposes of specifying products substitution shall refer to the submittal of a product not explicitly approved by the construction documents / specifications. 1. Substitutions of specified equipment shall be submitted and received by the Engineer ten (10) days prior to the bid date for review and written approval. Regulatory Agency approval for all substitutions will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. To receive consideration, requests for substitutions must be accompanied by documentary proof of its equality with the specified material. Documentary proof shall be in letterform and identify the specified values/materials alongside proposed equal values/materials. In addition, catalog brochures and samples, if requested, must be included in the submittal. ONLY PRE-BID APPROVED PRODUCTS, ISSUED VIA A FORMAL BID ADDENDUM TO ALL BIDDERS, WILL BE ALLOWED ON THE PROJECT. REGARDLESS OF THE APPROVAL ON ANY SUBSTITUTION, ALL BIDS SHALL BE BASED ON THE PRODUCTS EXACTLY AS SPECIFIED. PRICING FOR EACH APPROVED SUBSTITUTION SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE BID SUBMITTAL AS A SEPARATE LINE ITEM. 2. In the event that written authorization is given for a substitution, after award of contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer quotations from suppliers / distributors of both the specified and proposed equal material for price comparison, as well as a verification of delivery dates that conform to the project schedule. 3. In the event of cost reduction, the Owner will be credited with 100 percent of the reduction, arranged by Change Order. GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-5 16010 - Electrical 121112

4. The Contractor warrants that substitutions proposed for specified items will fully perform the functions required. D. Alternates \ Alternatives: For the purposes of specifying products, alternatives / alternates may be established to enable the Owner / Architect / Engineer to compare costs where alternative materials or methods might be used. An alternate price shall be submitted in addition to the base bid for consideration. If the alternate is deemed acceptable, written authorization will be issued. E. No Known Equal: For the purposes of specifying products, No Known Equal shall mean that the Owner / Architect / Engineer is not aware of an equivalent product. The Contractor will need to submit a Substitution item, per the requirements listed above, if a different product is proposed to be utilized. 1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS / SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings / Submittals shall be submitted in six (6) bound sets accompanied by Letter of Transmittal, which shall give a list of the number and dates of the drawings submitted. Drawings shall be complete in every respect and bound in sets. B. The Shop Drawings / Submittals submitted shall be marked with the name of the project, numbered consecutively and bear the approval of the Contractor as evidence that the Contractor has checked the Drawings. Any Drawings submitted without this approval will be returned to the Contractor for resubmission. C. If the shop drawings show variations from the requirements of the Contract because of standard shop practice or other reasons, the Contractor shall make specific mention of such variations in the Contractor's letter of transmittal. If the substitution is accepted, the Contractor shall be responsible for proper adjustment that may be caused by the substitution. Samples shall be submitted when requested. D. Only products listed as Equal within the contract documents, along with formally approved Substitutions will be reviewed. Products not conforming to these items will not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor for re-submittal. E. Review comments used in response to shop drawings / submittals are: No Exception Taken Product approved as submitted. Furnish As Corrected Re-submittal not required, although the Contractor shall provide the submitted product with corrections as noted. Revise And Resubmit Re-submittal required with corrections as noted. Rejected Re-submittal required based upon the originally specified product. F. Shop drawings shall be submitted on the following but not limited to: Lighting Fixtures, Lamps and Ballasts Switchgear, Switchboards, Distribution Boards, Motor Control Centers, Panel boards, and Bus Ducts; complete with overcurrent device information Transformers Fire alarm System/Central Monitoring System 16010-6 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - Electrical 121112

Wiring Devices Lighting Control System / Dimming System Products Pullboxes and Underground Vaults Terminal Cabinets Lighting Inverters, UPSs, RDCs, PDUs, Generators, Transfer Switches, TVSS Systems Cable Tray, Flexible Cable tray and Cable Runway Power Poles and Floor Boxes Arc Flash, Short-Circuit & Coordination studies All other products called out on drawings that call for shop drawing submittal 1.11 MAINTENANCE, SERVICING, INSTRUCTION MANUALS AND WIRING DIAGRAMS A. Prior to final acceptance of the job, the Electrical Contractor shall furnish to the Owner at least four (4) copies of operating and maintenance and servicing instructions, as well as four (4) complete wiring diagrams for the following items or equipment: Lighting Control System / Dimming Systems. Fire alarm system. Transformers. Switchgear, Switchboards, Distribution Boards, Motor Control Centers, Panel boards, and Bus Ducts; complete with over current device information. Lighting Inverters, UPSs, PDUs, Generators, Transfer Switches, TVSS Systems B. All wiring diagrams shall specifically cover the system supplied. Typical drawings will not be accepted. Four (4) copies shall be presented to the Owner. 1.12 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE OR SERVICE SHUTDOWN: A. Any interruption of electrical services, electrical circuits, electrical feeders, signal systems, communication systems, fire alarm systems, etc. required to perform work shall meet the specific prior-approval requirements of the Owner. Such work shall be scheduled with the Owner to be performed at the Owner's convenience. B. Interruptions/outages of any of the Owner s systems and services mentioned above shall be scheduled to occur during other than the Owner s normal business hours. Any overtime costs shall be borne by the Contractor. C. See drawings for any additional requirements regarding outages, interruption and any temporary services required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials and Equipment: All electrical materials and equipment, including custom-made equipment, shall be new and shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) and bear their label or be listed and certified by a Nationally Recognized Testing Lab (NTRL) that is also recognized by the local Authority-Having-Jurisdiction (AHJ). B. Switchgear /Switchboards / Distribution Boards / Motor Control Centers: 1. See general single line notes on single line drawing for more information. GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-7 16010 - Electrical 121112

C. Panel boards - Branch Circuit: 1. See drawings for panel board schedules and specifications. D. Transformers: 1. See drawings for transformer schedules and specifications. E. Lighting Fixtures: 1. See drawings for lighting fixture and lamp schedules and additional specifications. Furnish, install and connect a lighting fixture at each outlet where a lighting fixture type symbol (designated on plans) is shown as being installed. Each fixture shall be complete with all required accessories including sockets, glassware, boxes, spacers, mounting devices, fire rating enclosure and lamps. 2. Ballasts: See lighting fixture schedule notes. All noisy ballasts shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. 3. Lamps: See lamp / fixture schedule and lamp / lighting fixture schedule notes. F. Wiring Devices: 1. Provide wiring devices indicated per plan. Devices shall be specification grade. Acceptable manufactures are Leviton, Pass & Seymour and Hubbell. Provide all similar devices of same manufacturer, unless indicated otherwise. All device colors shall be from the full range of manufacturer standard color options as selected by the Architect. This selection will be made during the shop drawing review process Wiring Devices (Decora) Convenience Receptacle #16252-??? Dedicated Receptacle #16352-??? Convenience I.G. Receptacle #16262-IG-??? Dedicated I.G. Receptacle #16362-IG-??? Convenience G.F.C.I. Receptacle #7599-??? Dedicated G.F.C.I. Receptacle #7899-??? Tamper Resistant Convenience Receptacle #TDR15-??? Tamper Resistant Dedicated Receptacle #TDR20-??? Tamper Resistant GFCI Receptacle #T7899-??? Weather/Tamper Resistant GFCI Receptacle #W7899-T?? Convenience Simplex Receptacle #16251-??? Dedicated Simplex Receptacle #16351-??? Recessed Clock Receptacle #5361-CH-???(Non-Decora) Single Pole Switch #5621-2-??? Double Pole Switch #5622-2-??? Three Way Switch #5623-2-??? Four Way Switch #5624-2-??? Pilot Light Switch On #5628-2-??? Pilot Light Switch Off #5631-2-??? Projection Screen Switch #5657-2-??? Low Voltage Momentary Switch #5657-2-??? 16010-8 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - Electrical 121112

Keyed Switch #1221-2L-???(Non-Decora) Door Jam Switch #1865-??? 2. I.G. (isolated ground) receptacle bodies shall be of a basic color specified above with an orange triangle to symbolize isolated ground. 3. When shown circuited with an I.G. conductor, receptacles shall be of an I.G. type. As an example, a NEMA L6-30R denoted on the plans and shown circuited with an I.G. conductor shall be an I.G. version of that receptacle. 4. Wiring devices located in wood finished areas shall generally be black unless otherwise indicated by the Architect. 5. Wiring devices located in mirrors shall generally be white with stainless steel cover plates unless otherwise indicated by the Architect. 6. In addition to other device requirements listed elsewhere in this specification, 125V, 15A and 20A Tamper-Resistant wiring devices shall be provided as follows: a. In dwelling units per NEC, or CEC where adopted, Article 210.52. b. In pediatric care areas per NEC, or CEC where adopted, Article 517.18(C). c. In child care or day care facilities. d. In wet and/or exterior locations. 7. Wiring devices located in general care areas and critical areas per NEC, or CEC where adopted, Article 517 shall be listed and identified as hospital grade (Decora Style) unless otherwise noted. 8. Wiring device cover plates located on recessed boxes shall be commercial grade nylon. Plate color shall match wiring device color u.o.n. on plans. Cover plates utilized on surface mounted boxes shall be metal. Plastic cover plates are unacceptable. 9. All wiring device plates on the project shall be labeled with panel and circuit number(s) utilizing a Brother P-Touch labeling system utilizing 1/2" tape (yellow on black) or equal by Herman-Tellerman or Panduit. Locate label on the concealed side of the wiring device plate. Handwritten labels are unacceptable. 10. The following device plates shall be engraved: a. Key operated switches, switches with Pilot Lights and Switches for the control of motors, heaters and ventilators. Engraving shall be black and occur on the exposed side of the plate and indicate the motor, heater, or ventilator controlled. b. Receptacles on generator and/or UPS power shall have custom stamped plates with the words Generator or UPS in black letters. 11. Weatherproof Outlet Covers/Assemblies. All Receptacles identified as weatherproof on the drawings shall be Weather-Resistant, Tamper-Resistant, GFCI type and equipped as follows: a. Type WP-A: Recessed wall box with a hinged, lockable, cast aluminum, selfclosing, gasket-equipped door that is wet location-listed raintight while "in use". Unit shall comply with NEC, or CEC where adopted, Article 406.8(A) and (B). U.O.N. on drawings, provide a minimum of 2 separate compartments suitable for installation GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-9 16010 - Electrical 121112

power receptacles, AV or communications outlets. Additionally, unless otherwise noted on drawings, provide the following: - A 20A Weather-Resistant, Tamper-Resistant, GFCI duplex receptacle in the first compartment. Provide branch circuiting per plans. - A blank metal plate suitable for field installation of power, AV or communications devices in the second compartment. - Where indicated on plans as requiring data, AV, or other low voltage service outlet, provide min. 3/4"C.O. with pull string routed from the second compartment to nearest low voltage pull box. Where shown mounted in a building wall, any blank/unused compartment shall be equipped min. 3/4" CO with pull string routed to the nearest accessible ceiling space. - See wiring device section of this specification for additional wiring device plate cover labeling requirements. - 1 key minimum per device (minimum of 2 per project) to the Owner's project manager upon completion of project. - Custom color powder coat finish as selected by Architect - Include all costs in base bid for same. In locations with sufficient wall depth, provide 6" wide x 6" tall x 5-1/2" deep recessed wall box (C.W. Cole #TL310-WCS-K1-CUSTOM COLOR). In locations utilizing shallow stud walls construction or other walls of insufficient depth, provide 10-3/4" wide x 7-3/8" tall x 3-7/8" deep recessed wall box (C.W. Cole #TL310-WCS-SH-K1 -CUSTOM COLOR). See drawings for additional details. b. Type/Subscript WP-B: Wet location-listed raintight while "in use" cast copper-free aluminum lockable cover with baked aluminum lacquer finish and one gang GFCI receptacle. Hubbell WP26M series. Polycarbonate covers are unacceptable. Unit shall comply with NEC, or CEC where adopted, Article 406.8(A) and (B). Contractor shall powder coat cover assembly to a custom color where receptacle locations are deemed by the Architect to be in aesthetically sensitive or public spaces. Custom color as selected by Architect. c. Type WP-C: (C.W. Cole #TL310-WCS-PED-K1-CUSTOM COLOR) pedestal device box with a hinged, lockable, cast aluminum, self-closing, gasket-equipped door that is wet location - listed raintight while "in use". Unit shall comply with NEC, or CEC where adopted, Article 406.8(A) and (B). U.O.N. on drawings, provide a minimum of 2 separate compartments suitable for installation power receptacles, AV or communications outlets. Additionally, unless otherwise noted on drawings, provide the following: - A 20A Weather-Resistant, Tamper-Resistant, GFCI duplex receptacle in the first compartment. Provide branch circuiting per plans. - A blank metal plate suitable for field installation of power, AV or communications devices in the second compartment. - Where indicated on plans as requiring data, AV or other LV outlet, provide min. 3/4"C.O. with pull string routed from the second compartment to nearest low voltage pull box. - See wiring device section of this specification for additional wiring device plate 16010-10 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - Electrical 121112

cover labeling requirements. - 1 key minimum per device (minimum of 2 per project) to the Owner's project manager upon completion of project. - Custom color powder coat finish as selected by Architect - Include all costs in base bid for same. See drawings for additional details. G. Motor Controllers / Starters: See drawings for motorized equipment schedules and specifications. H. Circuit Breakers: 1. Service entrance circuit breakers smaller than 400 Amp frame shall be thermal-magnetic trip with inverse time current characteristics unless otherwise indicated below. Service entrance main circuit breakers, 400 Amp frame and larger shall be 100% rated, solid-state type as outlined in this specification. All other service entrance circuit breakers, 400 Amp frame and larger, shall be 100% rated, solid-state type as outlined in this specification. 2. All non-service entrance circuit breakers 225 Amp and larger shall be thermal magnetic type and have continuously adjustable magnetic pick-ups of approximately 5 to 10 times trip rating. Breakers shall have easily changed trip rating plugs with trip ratings as indicated on the Drawings. Rating plugs shall be interlocked so they are not interchangeable between frames. Additionally, all non-service entrance circuit breakers, 600 Amp frame and larger, located in 480v 3 phase, 3-wire or 277/480v, 3 phase 4-wire switchgear, distribution boards or panel boards, shall be solid state, 100% rated. Breaker shall have built-in test points for testing long delay and instantaneous, and ground fault (where shown) functions of the breaker by means of a 120-volt operated test kit. Contractor shall utilize a test kit capable of testing all breakers 400 Amp and above - at the Engineer s request. 3. All non-service entrance circuit breakers less than 225 Amp shall be molded plastic case, air circuit breakers conforming to UL 489. Provide breakers with thermal magnetic trip units, and a common trip bar for two- or three-pole breakers, connected internally to each pole so tripping of one pole will automatically trip all poles of each breaker. Provide breakers of tripfree and trip-indicating bolt-on type, with quick-make, quick-break contacts. Provide single two- or three-pole breaker interchangeability. Provide padlocking device for circuit breakers as shown on the Drawings. 4. Where a Current Limiting Circuit Breaker (CLCB) is indicated on drawings or as required elsewhere in this specification, provide a U.L. listed current limiting thermal magnetic circuit breaker(s) u.o.n. An independently operating limiter section within a molded case is not allowed. Coordinate CLCB ratings as required to protect electrical system components on the load side of the CLCB to include, but not limited to, protecting automatic transfer switches, panel boards and lighting control panels. 5. Where a solid-state circuit breaker is indicated on drawings or as required elsewhere in this specification, provide a solid-state circuit breaker with minimum five function complete with built-in current transformers. The five functions shall be independently adjustable and consist of Overload/Long Time Amp Rating, Long Time Delay, Short Time Delay, Short Circuit/Instantaneous Pickup, but may also include Shunt Trip and/or Ground Fault if so indicated on the Drawings. Rating plugs shall be interlocked so they are not interchangeable between frames. Breaker shall have built-in test points for testing long delay and instantaneous, and ground fault (where shown) functions of the breaker by means of a 120- volt operated test kit. Contractor shall utilize a test kit capable of testing all breakers 400 Amp and above - at the Engineer s request. GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-11 16010 - Electrical 121112

6. Ground Fault Interrupting Breakers. Provide with molded plastic case, air circuit breakers, similar to above with ground fault circuit interrupt capability, conforming to UL Class A, Group 1. 7. Arc Fault Interrupting Breakers. Provide with molded plastic case, air circuit breakers, similar to above with arc fault circuit interrupt capability, conforming to UL 1699 & UL Class A, Group 1. Provide on all-dwelling unit circuits supplying bedrooms, sleeping quarters etc as required to comply with NEC, or CEC where adopted, Article 210.12(B). 8. Tandem or half-sized circuit breakers are not permitted. 9. Series Rated Breakers. UL listed series rated combinations of breakers can be used to obtain panelboard-interrupting ratings shown on Drawings. If series rated breakers are used, switchboards, distribution boards and panel boards shall be appropriately labeled to indicate the use of series rated breakers. Shop drawing submittal shall include chart of U.L. listed devices, which coordinate to provide series rating. 10. Circuit breakers shall be standard interrupting construction. Panelboard shall accept standard circuit breakers up to 225 amperes. 11. Circuit breaker handle accessories shall provide provisions for locking handle in the on or off position. 12. Shunt trip equipped circuit breakers shall be provided on all elevator feeders. 13. Temperature compensating circuit breaker(s) shall be provided when located in outdoor enclosure(s) or when located in an enclosure subject to high ambient heat due to nearby industrial processes etc. 14. Provide 75 degree Celsius-rated conductor lugs/lug kits as required on all circuit breakers to accept conductor quantities and sizes shown on drawings. 15. All circuit breaker terminations shall be suitable for use with 75 degrees Celsius ampacity conductors. I. Disconnect Switches: 1. Non-fusible or fusible, heavy-duty, externally operated horsepower-rated, 600V A.C. Provide NEMA 3R, lockable enclosures for all switches located on rooftops, in wet or damp areas and in any area exposed to the elements. 2. Fusible switches shall be Class R. 3. Amperage, Horsepower, Voltage and number of poles per drawings- all of which shall be clearly marked on the switch nameplate. 4. Provide the Owner s project manager with one (1) spare set of fuses and two (2) sets of fuse clips/fuses for every set of fuses on the project. 16010-12 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - Electrical 121112

J. Fuses: 1. Provide fuses at all locations shown on the Drawings and as required for supplemental protection. a. Fuses shall be manufactured by Bussman, Shawmut, or equal. b. All fuses shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 2. Main and Feeder Protection. a. Where rating of protective device is greater than 600A, provide Bussman Hi-Cap fuses, Class L, current limiting, having an interrupting rating of 200,000A RMS. b. Where rating of protective device is 600A or less, provide Bussman Class RK series current limiting fuses, having an interrupting rating of 200,000A RMS. 3. Motor Protection. a. Where rating of protective device is greater than 600A, provide Bussman Hi-Cap fuses, Class L, current limiting, having an interrupting rating of 200,000A RMS. b. Where rating of protective device is 600A or less, provide Bussman Class RK series current limiting fuses, having an interrupting rating of 200,000A RMS. c. Where fuses feeding motors are indicated but not sized, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor shall coordinate the fuse size with the motor to provide proper motor running protection. d. When rejection type fuses are specified (Class RK series) the fuse holder of all switches (specified in other Sections) shall be suitable for the fuses provided. K. Cable Tray, Flexible Cable Tray and/or Cable Runway: 1. See drawings for Cable Tray, Flexible Cable Tray and/or Cable Runway specifications. L. Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS): 1. See drawings for UPS schedules and specifications. M. Power Distribution Units (PDU): 1. See drawings for PDU schedules and specifications. N. Generator Systems: 1. (NOT USED). O. Transfer Switches: 1. (NOT USED). GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-13 16010 - Electrical 121112

P. Lighting Control 1. See drawings for lighting controls and specifications. Q. Fire Alarm System: 1. See drawings. R. Transient Voltage Suppression TVSS: 1. (NOT USED). S. Conduit: 1. Galvanized Rigid Conduit (GRC) shall be full weight threaded type steel. Steel conduit shall be protected by overall zinc coating to inside and outside surfaces, applied by the hot dip, metallizing, or sherardizing process. 2. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC), shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with UL 1242 and meeting Federal Specification WWC-581 (latest revision). 3. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be zinc-coated steel with baked enamel or plastic finish on inside surfaces. EMT shall be dipped in a chromic acid bath to chemically form a corrosion-resistant protective coating of zinc chromate over galvanized surface. 4. Flexible metal conduit shall be constructed of aluminum or hot-dipped galvanized steel strips wound spirally with interlocking edges to provide greatest flexibility with maximum strength. Interior surfaces shall be smooth and offer minimum drag to pulling in conductors. Use only as directed in writing by the Engineer with the exception of 400 Hz feeders and 400 Hz branch circuits which shall be run in flexible aluminum conduit. 5. Liquid-tight conduit (Seal-Tite) shall be galvanized steel flexible conduit as above except with moisture and oil-proof jacket, pre-cut lengths and factory-installed fittings. For outdoor installations and motor connections only unless otherwise noted on drawings. 6. Factory assembled, or off-site assembled wiring systems (such as Metal Clad (MC) Cable, Type AC Cable, Type NM Cable, Type BX Cable, etcr) shall not be used unless otherwise indicated in the Allowed Specification Deviations Section or Deductive/Additive Alternate Pricing Section generally located on the symbols list drawing. 7. When approved for use in the Allowed Specification Deviations Section, generally located on the symbols list drawing, MC cables shall be allowed for lighting branch circuits (homeruns shall be EMT), receptacle branch circuits (homeruns shall be EMT) and poke-thru fed systems furniture homeruns. MC shall not be used where exposed, except for a maximum 6 length for final connections to light fixtures, or terminate in electrical panelboards or distribution boards. Equipment ground conductor shall be green. Isolated ground conductor shall be green with yellow stripe. Provide 600V rated aluminum or lightweight steel interlocking armor Metal Clad (MC) cable with copper conductors, THHN (90 degree C) insulation, and integral equipment grounding conductor and isolated grounding conductor as required. Type AC cable listed for use in patient care areas per NEC or CEC where adopted, Article 517.13 shall be required in such areas in lieu of MC cable. MC cable shall be manufactured to UL Standard 1569. See Execution section of this specification for 16010-14 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - Electrical 121112

additional installation requirements. 8. Nonmetallic Flexible Tubing (ENT) shall not be used unless otherwise indicated in the Allowed Specification Deviations Section or Deductive/Additive Alternate Pricing Section generally located on the symbols list drawing. Use of ENT, if allowed, is strictly limited to use in CMU walls and parking structures decks or as directed in writing by the Engineer. See Execution section of this specification for additional installation requirements. 9. Non-Metallic Conduit: a. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) rigid conduit, Schedule 40, Type II for underground installation only with solvent welded joints, conforming to Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) requirements, listed for exposed and direct burial application. b. Conduit and fittings shall be produced by the same manufacturer. 10. Fire-rated MC Cable: T. Fittings: a. 2-hour fire-rated, polymer insulated 600V MC cable listed and conforming to Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 2196 & UL 1569 requirements for installation as an Electrical Circuit Protective System for use in complying with NEC, or CEC where adopted, Articles 695 and 700. Cable sheath shall be suitable for use as a NEC or CEC where adopted, equipment grounding conductor and shall be listed for use in wet locations to 90 degrees C. (Raychem or equal). b. Cable connectors shall be brass MC connectors. 1. Condulet type fittings shall be smooth inside and out, taper threaded with integral insulating bushing and of the shapes, sizes and types required to facilitate installation or removal of wires and cables from the conduit and tubing system. These fitting shall be of metal, smooth inside and out, thoroughly galvanized, and sherardized cadmium plated. 2. Metallic condulet covers shall have the same finish as the fitting and shall be provided for the opening of each fitting where conductors do not pass through the cover. 3. Connector, coupling, locknut, bushings and caps used with rigid conduit shall be steel, threaded and thoroughly galvanized. Bushings shall be insulated. 4. U.O.N. all EMT fittings, connectors and couplings installed in concealed locations, areas not considered to be wet or damp locations by the AHJ, or areas not subject to physical damage, shall be steel, zinc or cadmium plated, threadless, compression, steel locking ring type with insulated throat. Where suitable for use, steel set screw fittings are allowed for trades sizes of 2 and smaller. Insulated throat is not required for fittings, connectors and couplings 1 and smaller. 5. All interior and exterior EMT fittings, connectors and couplings, 2 and smaller, installed in exposed or concealed locations that are considered by the AHJ to be wet or damp locations, shall be raintite-listed, steel zinc or cadmium plated, threadless, compression, steel locking ring type with insulated throat. If raintite-listed, steel, zinc or cadmium plated, threadless, compression, steel locking ring type with insulated throat. If raintite-listed, EMT fittings, connectors and couplings are unavailable for a given trade size or if conduit is installed in an GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-15 16010 - Electrical 121112

area subject to damage provide rigid metallic or intermediate metallic conduits, fittings, connectors and couplings as required. 6. Flexible steel conduit connectors shall be a malleable iron clamp or squeeze type or steel twist-in type with insulated throat. The finish shall be zinc or cadmium plating. 7. Conduit unions shall be "Erickson" couplings, or approved equal. The use of running threads will not be permitted. U. 600 Volt Conductors - Wire and Cable: 1. All conductors shall be copper. Provide stranded conductor for #10 AWG and larger or when making flexible connections to vibrating machinery. Use compression "fork" type connectors or transition to solid conductors when connecting to switches, receptacles, etc. 2. Type THHN/THWN-2 thermoplastic, 600 volt, UL approved, dry and wet locations rated at 90 degrees Celsius, for conductors of all sizes from #12 AWG up to and including 1000 kcmil. RHH/RHW insulation is allowed only to provide an Electrical Circuit Protective System to comply with NEC, or CEC where adopted, Articles 695 and 700. 3. Wire and cable shall be new, manufactured not more than six (6) months prior to installation, shall have size, type of insulation, voltage rating and manufacturer's name permanently marked on outer covering at regular intervals. 4. Wire and cable shall be factory color-coded by integral pigmentation with a separate color for each phase and neutral. Each system shall be color-coded and it shall be maintained throughout. 5. Systems Conductor Color Coding: a. Power 208/120V, 3PH, 4W: (1) Phase A = Black (2) Phase B = Red (3) Phase C = Blue (4) Neutral = White (5) Switchlegs = Purple (Switchlegs shall also be identified separately by numerical tags). (6) Travelers = Purple with Black stripe. b. Power 480/277V, 3PH, 4W: (1) Phase A = Brown (2) Phase B = Orange (3) Phase C = Yellow (4) Neutral = Grey (5) Switch legs = Purple (Switchlegs shall also be identified separately by numerical tags). (6) Travelers = Purple with black stripe. 16010-16 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - Electrical 121112

c. Ground Conductors: Green d. Isolated Ground Conductors: Green with continuous yellow stripe. e. Fire Alarm System: As recommended by the manufacturer. 6. All color-coding for #12 thru #6 AWG conductor shall be as identified above. Conductors #4 AWG and larger shall be identified with utilizing phase tape at each termination. 7. No conductors carrying 120 volt or more shall be smaller than #12 AWG. 8. Aluminum conductors shall not be used. 9. Wire-pulling compounds used as lubricants in installing conductors in raceways shall only be "Polywater J". No oil, grease, graphite, or similar substances may be used. Pulling of #1/0 or larger conductors shall be done with an approved cable pull machine. Other methods; e.g. using vehicles and block and tackle to install conductors are not acceptable. V. Medium Voltage Conductors (greater than 600V):: 1. (NOT USED). W. Junction and Pullboxes: 1. For interior dry locations, boxes shall be galvanized one-piece drawn steel, knockout type, with removable, machine screw secured covers. 2. For outside, damp or surface locations, boxes shall be heavy cast aluminum or cast iron with removable, gasketed, non-ferrous machine screw secured covers. 3. For in-grade applications, junction and pull boxes shall be pre-cast concrete or molded fiberglass manufactured by Christy, Brooks-Jensen, or Utility Vault Co. Fiberglass boxes shall: a. Be used only in landscape planter areas that are not subject to damage from lawnmowers, tractors and other machinery. b. Not be used in lawn or turf areas. c. Not exceed 11 W x 17 L in size unless required to be larger to meet code requirements. 4. All boxes shall be sized for the number and sizes of conductors and conduits entering the box and equipped with plaster rings where required. 5. All boxes located in traffic areas shall be traffic rated. X. Outlet Boxes: 1. For fixtures, boxes shall be galvanized, one-piece drawn steel, knockout type equipped with 3/8" fixture studs and plaster rings where required. GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-17 16010 - Electrical 121112

2. For convenience outlets, wall switches, or other devices, outlet boxes shall be galvanized one-piece drawn steel, knockout type 4" x 4"x 1-1/2" minimum size with plaster rings as required. 3. For locations where standard boxes are not suitable due to number and size of conduit to be terminated, special boxes shall be designed to fit space or meet other requirements and submitted for approval. 4. For exposure to weather, damp locations, or surface mounting, outlet boxes shall be heavy cast aluminum or cast iron with threaded hubs; covers shall be watertight with gaskets and non-ferrous screws. 5. Outlet boxes used for support of ceiling fans shall be galvanized, one-piece drawn steel, knockout type equipped with bracing bars & plaster rings where required and listed for ceiling fan support use. Such boxes shall be labeled and capable of supporting ceiling fan weights up to 70 pounds. 6. See drawings for floor box installation notes and specifications. Y. Plywood Backboards: Where indicated for telephone or communications system terminals or other equipment assemblies, provide backboards of size indicated. Use 3/4" thick x 8' tall (length per plans), Douglas Fir, void-free, kiln-dried, fire-rated plywood finished on one side and prime coat painted on all surfaces with finish coat of enamel paint, color by Architect. Leave one (1) fire-rating stamp/sheet exposed for inspection. Z. Terminal Cabinets: 1. Terminal cabinets shall be fabricated of hot dipped galvanized code gauge sheet metal for flush or surface mounting, complete with barriered sections, a door for each vertically barriered section and sizes as indicated on plan. Doors shall be hinged and lockable. Locks shall be keyed to match the branch circuit panelboards. Terminal cabinet trims shall match the branch circuit panels. 2. Provide each terminal cabinet with a full size plywood backboard. 3. Terminal cabinets shall be installed complete with full-length skirts of the same construction and finish as the terminal cabinet. 4. Where mounted outdoors, terminal cabinets shall be NEMA 3R, weatherproof complete with gaskets and required sealant to prevent moisture from entering the terminal cabinet. 5. All terminal cabinets and terminal cabinet barriered sections shall be labeled by the cabinet or cabinet section use (i.e. CATV, Security, etc). Labels shall be Micarta type as specified elsewhere in these specifications. Unless otherwise noted, all termination blocks and cables shall be labeled per ANSI/EIA 606 standard. AA. Painting: Terminal cabinets, panels, junction boxes, pull boxes, etc., and conduit installed in public view shall be painted with colors selected by the Architect to match the subject surface. Refer to painting section of the specifications for additional requirements. 16010-18 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - Electrical 121112

BB. Seismic Design and Anchoring of Electrical Equipment: 1. Seismic Protection Criteria: All Electrical and Mechanical machinery installations provided, as part of this contract located in any Seismic Risk Zone of the Uniform Building Code Seismic Risk Map shall be protected from earthquakes in accordance with the International Building Code and, as applicable, the state and local building codes and regulations. Protection criteria for these zones shall be a Horizontal Force Factor as prescribed by the IBC, or locally adopted building codes, multiplied by the machinery weight considered passing through the machinery center of gravity in any horizontal direction. Unless vibration isolation is required to protect machinery against unacceptable structure transmitted noise and/or vibration, machinery shall be protected from earthquakes by rigid structurally sound attachment to the load supporting structure. The force factor and anchorage shall be determined by calculations performed and submitted to the Architect by a professional engineer registered in state where the work is being performed (civil or structural) hired by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of seismic restraint systems for all pieces of equipment weighing over 50 pounds including but not limited to the following: a. Switchgear, Switchboards, Distribution Boards, Motor Control Centers, and Panel boards. b. Conduits/Conduit support trapezes c. Transformers d. Light Fixtures e. Inverters, UPSs, RDCs, PDUs, Generators, Transfer Switches f. Cable Tray, Flexible Cable Tray, Ladder Tray g. Bus Duct 2. Seismic protection, labor, materials and design shall be included in the Contract sum. CC. Trenching and Backfilling: Contractor shall be responsible for trenching and backfilling. Refer to Trenching and Backfilling section of the specifications for complete requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A. Installation of Conduit and Outlet Boxes: 1. All conduit installed in the dry walls or ceilings of a building shall be steel tube (EMT), aluminum tube (EMT), or Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC). Flexible conduit shall not be used in lieu of EMT, IMC or rigid conduit except as noted herein. 2. Galvanized rigid conduit (GRC) or intermediate metal conduit (IMC) shall be used as follows: - when noted on the drawings. - when considered exposed to damage by the local AHJ. - when installed in wet or damp locations and of a trade size where listed-raintite fittings, connectors, couplings etc. are unavailable. - when required by NEC or CEC Article 517.13. GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-19 16010 - Electrical 121112

- when installed in concrete and masonry. The use of ENT in CMU walls and parking structures may be allowed only as directed in writing by the Engineer. Request for ENT substitution must be made prior to bid and in accordance with pre-bid substitution requests requirements of these specifications. 3. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC), is approved for use in all locations as approved for GRC or EMT and in accordance with NEC, or CEC where adopted, Article 342. 4. Flexible steel conduit shall only be permitted to be used at light fixture outlets and connections to vibrating electrical equipment. All flexible steel conduit runs shall be less than 6'-0". All outdoor installation shall be made using liquid-tight flex with approved fittings. Include a separate insulated green ground conductor sized per NEC in each conduit. Other uses of flexible conduit shall be allowed only as approved in writing by the Engineer. 5. Flexible liquidtight conduit shall be installed in lieu of the flexible steel; where required by the NEC, or CEC where adopted, in damp and wet location, where exposed to weather, in refrigerated area (65 F or less), and/or between seismic joints. All rotating electrical equipment shall be supplied with flexible, liquid-tight conduit with appropriate slack and shall not exceed thirty-six (36) inches. Include a separate insulated green ground conductor sized per NEC in each conduit. Other uses of liquidtight flexible conduit shall be allowed as approved in writing by the Engineer on a case by case basis. 6. Rigid metallic conduit installed underground or embedded in concrete shall be 1 trade size minimum and shall be wrapped with 20 mil polyvinyl chloride plastic tape, PVC conduit installed underground or embedded in concrete shall be 3/4 minimum trade size. 7. Where required for providing an Electrical Circuit Protective System to comply with NEC, or CEC where adopted, Articles 695 and 700, utilize UL listed 2-hour fire-rated, MC cable or UL listed 2-hour fire-rated RHH-RHW conductors in conduit. 8. Conduit shall be run so as not to interfere with other piping fixtures or equipment. 9. The ends of all conduits shall be cut square, carefully reamed out to full size and shall be shouldered in fitting. 10. No running threads will be permitted in locations exposed to the weather, in concrete or underground. Special union fittings shall be used in these locations. 11. Where conduit is underground, under slabs or grade, exposed to the weather, or in wet locations, make joints liquid tight and gas tight. 12. All metal conduit in masonry and concrete and where concealed under floor slabs shall have joints painted with thread compound prior to makeup. 13. PVC conduit shall not be run in walls. 14. Where conductors enter a raceway or a raceway in a cabinet, pull box, junction box, or auxiliary gutter, the conductors shall be protected by a plastic bushing type fitting providing a smoothly rounded insulating surface. 16010-20 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - Electrical 121112

15. Where conduit extends through roof to equipment on roof area, this Contractor shall provide flashing material compatible with the roofing system as required by the roofing specifications or as required by the Owner s roof warranty. This flashing shall be delivered to the roofing contractor for installation. The actual location of all such roof penetrations and outlets shall be verified by the Architect/Owner. Contractor shall verify type of flashing prior to bid and include all costs. 16. All conduit shall be supported at intervals not less than 6'-0" and within 12" from any outlet and at each side of bends and elbows. Conduit supports shall be galvanized, heavy stamped, two-hole conduit clamp properly secured. 17. Where conduit racks are used the rack shall consist of two piece conduit clamps attached to galvanized steel slotted channels, properly secured via threaded rods attached directly to the building structure. 18. Nail-in conduit supports, one-piece set screw type conduit clamps or perforated iron for supporting conduit shall not be used. 19. Seismic Conduit Support: a. All conduit shall be supported in such a manner that it is securely attached to the structure of the building. Attachment is to be capable of supporting the tributary weight of conduit and contents in any direction. Maximum spacing of support and braces are to be as follows: CONDUIT SIZE MAXIMUM SPACING 1/2" to 3" 6'-0" 3-1/2" to 4" 8'-0" 20. All conduit runs shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or intersection of vertical planes and ceilings. Field made bends and offset shall be avoided where possible. Crushed or deformed raceway shall not be installed. 21. Open knockouts in outlet boxes only where required for inserting conduit. 22. Locate wall outlet of the same type at same level in all rooms, except where otherwise noted. 23. Outlet boxes on metal studs shall be attached to metal hangers, tack welded or screwed to studs; on wood studs attachment shall be with wood screws, nails are not acceptable. 24. Recessed boxes shall not be mounted back-to-back in any wall; minimum offset shall be 24 inches. 25. Junction Boxes that do not contain any device(s) shall be located in storage rooms, electrical closets, or above accessible ceilings, not in hard lid ceilings or other forms of inaccessible ceilings. Place boxes which must be exposed to public view in a location approved by the Owner s Project Manager. Provide covers or plates to match adjacent surfaces as approved by the Owner s Project manager. 26. Surface mounted pull boxes, terminal cabinets, junction boxes, panel boards etc., shall be attached to walls using appropriate screws, fasteners, backing plates, stud blocking etc., GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-21 16010 - Electrical 121112

as detailed on Architectural and/or Structural drawings. If architectural and/or Structural drawings are not provided on the Project, Contractor shall provide all necessary mounting hardware and backing support to comply with local building code requirements and any additional requirements imposed by the local Authority-Having-Jurisdiction. 27. Except where below grade, sleeves shall be installed where conduit passes through masonry or concrete walls and shall be 24 gauge galvanized steel no more that 1/2" greater in diameter than the outside diameter of the conduit. When located in non-rated structures, caulk conduit sleeve with stone wool. When located in fire rated structures, provide U.L. listed fire stopping system. See fire stopping section of this specification for additional requirements. 28. All boxes shall be covered with outlet box protector, Appleton SB-CK, or similar device / method to keep dirt / debris from entering box, conduit or panels. If dirt / debris does get in, it shall be removed prior to pulling wires. 29. All boxes installed outdoors shall be suitable for outdoor installations, gasketed, screw cover and painted as directed by the Architect with weatherproof paint to match building. 30. All conduit entries to outdoor mounted panels, cabinets, boxes, etc., shall be made using Myers "SCRU-TITE" hubs Series ST. 31. Provide nylon or a 1/8-inch O.D. polyethylene rope, rated at 250 pounds tensile strength, in all conduits more than 5 feet in length left empty for future use. Not less than 5 feet of rope shall be left at each end of the conduit. Tag all lines with a plastic tag at each end indicating the termination/stub location of the opposite end of the conduit. 32. All multiple conduit runs within suspended ceilings shall be suspended from building structure by means of unistrut hangers/racks, Conduit shall not be allowed to lay on ceiling or be supported from ceiling suspension wires or other suspension system. Support conduit to structure above suspended ceilings 8" minimum above ceiling to allow removal of ceiling tile. Maintain two-inch clearance above recessed light fixtures 33. All exposed conduits and support hardware shall be painted to match the finish of the wall or ceiling to which it is supported. 34. Where conduits or wireways cross seismic joints, provide approved flexible conduit connection or approved expansion/deflection fitting to allow for displacement of conduit in all three axes. Connection shall allow for movement in accordance with design of seismic joint. Non-flexible raceways crossing expansion joints or other areas of possible structural movement shall make provision for 3-way movement at such points by means of expansion/deflection fittings. Fittings shall be installed in the center of their axes of movement and shall not be deflected to make part of a conduit bend, or compressed or extended to compensate for incorrect conduit expansion/deflection fittings(s) complete with ground jumpers. 35. Where necessary, provide approved expansion joints to allow for thermal expansion and contraction of conduit(s). Install expansion joints complete with ground jumpers. 36. Seal all conduits where termination is subject to moisture or where conduit penetrates exterior wall, floor or roof, in refrigerated areas, classified (hazardous areas) and as indicated on the drawings. 16010-22 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - Electrical 121112

37. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or elsewhere in these specifications, bends in feeder and branch circuit conduit 2 inches or larger shall have a radius or curvature of the inner edge, equal to not less than ten (10) times the internal diameter of the conduit. Except where sweeping vertically into a building where sweep radius equals ten (10) times conduit diameter, underground communications and building interconnect conduits 3 inches or larger shall have a minimum 12-6 radius or curvature of the inner edge. For the serving utilities, radius bends shall be made per their respective specifications. 38. Tag all empty conduits at each accessible end with a permanent tag identifying the purpose of the conduit, footage end-to-end, and the location of the other end. In wet, corrosive outdoor or underground locations, use brass, bronze, or copper 16 gauge tags secured to conduit ends with #16 or larger galvanized wire. Inscribe on the tags, with steel punch dies, clear and complete identifying information. 39. The following additional requirements shall apply to underground conduits: a. Underground conduit shall be Schedule 40 PVC (polyvinyl chloride) unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in these specifications or as required per NEC, or CEC where adopted Article 517.13. b. For all communications conduits 2" and larger and feeders 100 amps or greater, provide with a minimum 3" inch, (2,000 LB) concrete envelope, 2" inch minimum separation between conduits, installed at depth of not less than 24" below grade. (Provide concrete encasement and/or greater minimum conduit depth as required by the Utility Companies.) Conduit separation within a duct bank shall be maintained using plastic spacers located at 5'-0" intervals. Where power and communication conduits are run in a common trench, a 12" inch minimum separation shall be maintained between power and communication conduits or as required by Utility Companies. c. In all cases, where any conduit(s) pass under a building slab or footing, the electrical Contractor will provide a Bentonite clay or concrete barrier that conforms to the height and width of the trench excavation and is a minimum of 18" thick. In all cases, where conduit(s) pass thru a sleeve in a footing or other foundation element, the electrical Contractor will provide a Bentonite clay or concrete barrier between the sleeve and the conduit(s) surrounding the conduit(s) for the entire depth of the sleeve. The barrier is required to prevent passage of moisture under or thru the slab or footing via the trench or sleeve. d. Where underground conduit passes under a building slab, concrete encasement may not be required, except as required above, contact the Engineer for written direction prior to omitting any encasement. e. Underground conduits, which terminate inside building(s) below grade, such as in a basement level, or which slope so that water might flow into interior building spaces, shall be sealed at the point of penetration with a modular conduit seal (Link-Seal or equal by Rox Systems). Conduit/conduit sealing system penetrations of waterproofing membranes/systems on existing structures shall be completely restored as required to maintain membrane/system manufacturer and installer warranty for the installation. All conduits shall be provided with a 4% slope away from buildings. All conduits shall be installed such that the water cannot accumulate in the conduit and such that water drains into the nearest manhole, pull GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-23 16010 - Electrical 121112

box or vault not into the facility. In instances where grade changes or elevation differences prevent sloping of conduit away from a building into the nearest manhole, pull box or vault or where accumulation of water in a manhole, pull box or vault may result in water traveling into the facility, conduits shall be sealed internally at each end of each conduit using conduit sealing bushing, sized as required for the conductors contained within the conduit (O-Z Gedney #CSBG 100psig withstand or equal). In all cases, install plugs or caps in spare (empty) conduits at both ends of each conduit (Jackmoon or equal) preventing both water and gas from entering the facility via the conduits. f. Include a separate insulated green ground conductor sized per NEC, or CEC where adopted, in each underground electrical feeder / branch circuit. g. All underground conduits with circuits rated at 40 amps or greater and all underground communications conduits shall be provided with a metallic marker tape located 12 inches below the finished grade. h. Where underground conduits sweep into/thru slabs, utilize PVC 90 degree sweeps that transition, via female PVC adapter to GRC coupling mounted flush in slab. GRC couplings shall be 1/2 lap taped with 20-mil tape. If the distance of the conduit run between a sweep and the next connecting sweep, pullbox, vault or manhole exceeds 150 ft then the sweep shall be concrete encased. Exceptions: i. Communications conduits shown terminating at a finished floor shall have an additional 4 high GRC nipple equipped with a bushing, removable conduit plug, labeling tag and pull rope. Tie off pull rope to conduit plug. ii. iii. Utility conduit sweeps shall be installed per the requirements of the respective utility company. All PVC conduit shall be glued for a water and gas tight installation. The Contractor shall use appropriate solvent on all joints prior to gluing conduit together. 40. Installation of Metal Clad (MC) Cable (when use is permitted in the Allowed Specification Deviations Section generally located on the symbols list drawing). a. Provide J-box above accessible ceiling prior to running MC cable within partitions or walls. J-box shall be permanently labeled with panel identification and circuit numbers contained within. b. Overhead MC cable runs shall generally follow building lines to provide a neat and workmanlike installation. c. Provide code-sized j-boxes to accommodate MC cable splicing in general. For systems furniture poke-thrus feeds utilizing MC cable, transition from MC cables to conduit and wire near the panelboard in the TI accessible ceiling space on the floor below the panel board via code-sized gutter(s). Utilize UL listed, insulated barrier strips with recessed screw heads (Ideal #89-6?? Series or equal) fastened within the gutter(s), terminate MC conductors on one side of the strips(s) and individual conductors in conduit from the panelboard(s) on the other side of the strip(s). Label each terminal strip(s) with panel designation. Label each phase 16010-24 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - Electrical 121112

conductor with circuit number using wire markers (Ideal or equal). Wire nuts are not an acceptable alternative to the terminal strips in these underfloor transition locations. Provide (1) spare 3/4 conduit from each gutter to its respective panelboard. d. MC cable shall not run directly into panelboards, distribution boards or electrical rooms. e. MC cabling shall be provided with its own code-approved ceiling support wires, cable hangers, individual spring steel support clips, steel trapeze hangers, threaded rods or dedicated #10 AWG drop wire. Cable supports shall be fastened to concrete slabs, beams, joists or other structural members of the building. In no case shall MC cable rest on ceilings, suspended ceilings or structures. Do not support MC cable using ceiling support wires. The use of nylon cable ties to support MC cable is not allowed. f. Use lock or spring nut MC cable fittings. g. Cable runs shall be continuous from wiring device to wiring device no intermediate splicing j-boxes allowed. h. When terminating or splicing at a junction, outlet, or switch box, cut the cable with an armored cable rotary cutter such that 6-inches of free conductors remain for connections or splices. Use screw-in or spring lock connector and ensure a proper bonding by firmly tightening the connector to both the box and cable. Insert an anti-short bushing at cable ends to protect conductors from abrasion and use insulated connectors. i. MC cable bend radius shall not be less than seven (7) times the external diameter of the cable. j. MC cables passing through fire-rated walls or floors shall be firestopped as required with a UL listed system. See firestopping requirements outlined elsewhere in this specification for additional requirements. k. Installation shall not exceed code requirements for total current carrying conductors in multiple MC cable runs bundled together into a single MC cable hanger or strap, unless support device is specifically listed for such purpose. Neutrals shall be counted as current carrying conductors. l. Maintain MC cable clearance of at least 6 inches from hot water and any other high temperature pipes. Maintain at least 12-inches clearance between MC cable(s) and telecommunication conduits and cables. MC cable shall cross telecommunication cables and conduits at right angles. m. MC cabling shall not be run thru exposed ceilings, where open grid conditions exist, exposed on walls, or exposed to view. See Power Plan and Lighting Plan General Notes for additional requirements. B. Installation of 600-Volt Conductors: 1. All electrical wire, including signal circuits, shall be installed in conduit. 2. All circuits and feeder wires for all systems shall be continuous from over current protective GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-25 16010 - Electrical 121112

device or switch to terminal or farthest outlet. No joints shall be made except in pull, junction or outlet boxes, or in panel or switchboard gutters. a. Utilize preinsulated "winged" spring type connectors, 3M Company "Performance Plus" #O/B or #R/Y as required for splices and taps in conductors #6 AWG and smaller. When a spring connector is used in an underground environment or when subject to moisture, utilize a 3M Company Scotchcast 3507G epoxy resin connector sealing pack to seal the spring connector. b. Wires #4 AWG and larger AWG shall be joined together as follows: i. When located in an underground environment or when subject to moisture, the splice shall be made with compression connector and sealed by a 3M, or equal, PST cold shrink connector insulator. ii. When located in an interior environment, the splice shall be made with an Ilsco or equal dual rated, insulated splice-reducer connector or multi-tap connectorlisted for use with 75/90 degree Celsius rated conductors. c. Connections to busbar shall be made with dual-rated copper/aluminum one-piece compression lugs. Paralleled conductor connections shall be by mechanical lugs. 3. Thoroughly clean all conduit and wire-ways and see that all parts are perfectly dry before pulling any wires. 4. Install UL approved fixture wire from all lighting fixture lamp sockets into fixture outlet or junction box. 5. For 20 ampere branch circuit wiring, increase #12 conductors to #10 for 120 volt circuits longer than 100 feet and for 277 volt circuits longer than 150 feet. 6. Conductor Support. Provide conductor supports as required by codes and recommended by cable manufacturer. Where required, provide cable supports in vertical conduits and provide lower end of conduit with a ventilator. C. Grounding / Bonding: 1. Provide grounding and bonding for entire electric installation as shown on plans, as listed herein and as required by applicable codes. Included, but not limited to, are items that require grounding / bonding: a. Conduit, Raceways and Cable Trays. b. Neutral or identified conductors of interior wiring system. c. Panel boards, Distribution Boards, Switchgear and Switchboards. d. Non-current carrying metal parts of fixed equipment. e. Telephone distribution equipment. f. Inverters, UPS, PDU, RDC, Transfer Switch and Generator Systems. g. Raised Flooring. h. Antennas. i. Lightning Protection Systems. j. Metal piping installed in or attached to a building/structure. k. Metallically isolated structural steel. 16010-26 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - Electrical 121112

l. Metallically isolated underground metal water piping. m. Elevator hydraulic piston/lift case. 2. In multi-occupancy buildings, Contractor shall bond metal water piping systems installed in, under or attached to a building and/or structure serving individual occupancies where the piping system(s) are metallically isolated from each other. Per NEC, or CEC where adopted Art. 250.104(A)(2) and (4), the bonding conductor shall be sized per Table 250.122 and connected to the switchboard/panelboard serving that suite/occupancy. 3. Use of Ground Rods: Furnish and install required number of 3/4" x 10' copper clad ground rods to meet specified resistance, all required grounding wires, conduit and clamps. The size of the grounding conductors shall be not less than that set forth in the latest edition of the California Code of Regulations, Title 24, State of California and NEC (CEC, where adopted), unless otherwise indicated. Rods shall be installed such that at least 10 feet of length is in contact with the soil. Where rock bottom is encountered, the electrode shall be driven at an oblique angle not to exceed 45 degrees from vertical or shall be buried in a trench that is at least 30 inches deep. The upper end of the electrode shall be flush with or below ground level unless the above ground end and the grounding electrode conductor attachments are protected against physical damage. Unless otherwise noted, connection to the grounding electrode conductor may be by compression type or exothermic process connector. Mechanical connectors shall not be used. 4. Grounding System Connection: a. Compression connectors shall be unplated copper, manufactured by Burndy, or approved equal, designed specifically for the intended connection. b. Exothermic weld-type connectors shall be Cadweld manufactured by Erico Products, or approved equal, designed specifically for the intended connection. c. Mechanical connectors shall not be used. 5. Isolated Ground Receptacles shall have an insulated ground wire connected between the receptacle and the panelboard isolated ground bus. Unless otherwise noted, this ground wire shall not be grounded at any other point, and shall be distinguished from other ground wires by a continuous yellow stripe. 6. Provide separate green equipment ground conductor in all electrical raceways, to effectively ground all fixtures, panels, controls, motors, disconnect switches, exterior lighting standards, and noncurrent carrying metallic enclosures. Use bonding jumpers, grounding bushings, lugs, busses, etc., for this purpose. Connect the equipment ground to the building system ground. Use the same size equipment ground conductors as phase conductors, up through #10 AWG. Use NEC (or CEC where adopted) Table 250.122 for conductor size with phase conductors # 8 and larger, if not shown on the Drawings. 7. Clean the contact surfaces of all ground connections prior to making connections. 8. Ductwork. Provide a flexible ground strap, No. 6 AWG equivalent, at each flexible duct connection at each air handler, exhaust fan, and supply fan, and install to preclude vibration. 9. Motors. Connect the ground conductor to the conduit with an approved grounding bushing, and to the metal frame with a bolted solderless lug. Bolts, screws and washers shall be bronze or cadmium plated steel. GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-27 16010 - Electrical 121112

10. Building grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 25 ohms. D. Line Voltage and Low Voltage Power Supplies to all Mechanical Equipment Including Plumbing, Heating and Air Conditioning Units; 1. An electric power supply, including conduit, any necessary junction and/or outlet boxes and conductors and connection shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor for each item or mechanical equipment. 2. Power supplies to individual items of equipment shall be terminated in a suitable outlet or junction box adjacent to the respective item of equipment, or a junction box provided by the manufacturer or the equipment and directed by the Mechanical Contractor. Allow sufficient lengths of conductor at each location to permit connection to the individual equipment without breaking the wire run. 3. The location of all conduit terminations to the equipment is approximate. The exact location of these conduit terminations shall be located and installed as directed by the Mechanical and Plumbing Contractor. 4. Provide power supplies to all plumbing and mechanical equipment, including but not limited to, equipment furnished and installed by Owner or Contractor such as heating and air conditioning equipment, pumps, boilers, auto valves, water coolers, trap primers etc. The installation shall produce a complete and operable system. 5. Unless otherwise noted, this Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit, boxes, wires, etc., for line voltage wiring and low voltage wiring. 6. It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify with the Drawings of other trades regarding the extent of his responsibility for mechanical equipment. The bid must include a sum sufficient to cover the cost of the installation. 7. The location of all power supply connection and/or terminations to the mechanical equipment is approximate. The exact locations of these terminations shall be verified with other trades during construction. E. Prefabricated Equipment: Installation of all prefabricated items and equipment shall conform to the requirements of the manufacturer's specifications and installation instruction pamphlets. Where code requirements affect installation of materials and equipment, the more stringent requirements, code or manufacturer's instructions and/or specifications, shall govern the work. F. Firestopping: 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all material, labor, equipment, and services, in conjunction with the selection and installation of a complete and fully functioning and code compliant UL-listed fire stop assembly/system(s) as required by project conditions. 2. Each fire stop assembly/system shall have an "F" and/or "T" rating as required by each condition requiring fire stopping. Each fire stop assembly/system shall have a current U.L. listing, as indicated in the latest edition of the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory. Contractor shall verify acceptability of all fire stopping methods and system selections with the authority having jurisdiction prior to installation. The Contractor shall install each firestop 16010-28 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - Electrical 121112

assembly/system in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.. 3. Each fire stop assembly/system shall be labeled with fire stop manufacturer-furnished label on each side of the fire stopping systems depicting UL # etc. G. Housekeeping Pads 1. Provide a minimum 3" high housekeeping pad above finished floor/finished grade for all exterior floor mounted switchgear, switchboards, distribution boards, transformers, motor control centers etc flush with the face of the equipment. Provide a minimum 3" high housekeeping pad for all floor mounted switchgear, distribution boards, transformers, motor control centers, transfer switches etc located in mechanical central plant(s) and other mechanical spaces flush with the face of the equipment. Confirm pad dimensions with local inspector prior to forming pad to ensure any local code interpretations/conditions regarding housekeeping pads are met. 2. Unless otherwise noted above, provide a minimum 1-1/2" high housekeeping pad above finished floor/finished grade for all interior floor mounted switchgear, switchboards, distribution boards, transformers, motor control centers, transfer switches etc flush with the face of the equipment. All housekeeping pad heights are as measured from finished floor or grade. Confirm pad dimensions with local inspector prior to forming pad to ensure any local code interpretations/conditions regarding housekeeping pads are met. 3. Provide a 1-1/2" high housekeeping pad above finished floor/finished for service equipment. Prior to pad rough-in, Contractor shall verify serving utility company's maximum meter height requirements and, if necessary, adjust height of housekeeping pad to comply with those requirements. In indoor applications, the pad shall be flush the face of the switchgear. In outdoor applications, the housekeeping pad shall extend a minimum of 4 feet from the front of switchgear/switchboard s weatherproof enclosure. Confirm pad dimensions with local inspector prior to forming pad to ensure any local code interpretations/conditions regarding housekeeping pads are met. 4. All housekeeping pads located in, on or attached to a building shall be seismically braced/connected to the building structure. END OF SECTION GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-29 16010 - Electrical 121112